JP7295588B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when a game stop result is a special result.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine provided with a board (for example, a game control device, a main board) in which signal lines for communicating with another board (for example, a relay board) are wired (for example, Patent Document 1). . In addition, there is a game machine capable of displaying a plurality of effects on a display device used for effects (for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2017-12359 A JP 2010-69113 A

However, in conventional gaming machines, interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) may occur between signal patterns for communication. In addition, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

An object of the present invention is to suppress interference between signal patterns. Another object is to improve the interest of the game.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, game control means capable of executing a game and effect control means capable of executing effects related to the game are provided, and when the stop result of the game is a special result, a gaming machine capable of generating an advantageous state for a player, comprising: first display means capable of displaying the game; and second display means capable of displaying a performance display relating to the performance of the gaming machine; comprises game control program storage means for storing a game control program; arithmetic processing means for performing required processing according to the game control program; a plurality of signal patterns for outputting test signals relating to the game machine; a reset signal pattern for resetting a circuit is provided on the substrate , and in the substrate, the distance between the reset signal pattern and a signal pattern closer to the reset signal pattern among the plurality of signal patterns is a plurality of intervals. Wider than the minimum interval between the signal patterns, the effect control means generates a first notice effect indicating the degree of expectation that the game stop result will be the special result, and a first notice effect after the first notice effect. and a second advance notice effect to be executed, and as the aspect of the first notice effect and the aspect of the second notice effect, the first identification aspect, or a more expected than the first identification aspect The second identification mode with a high degree of degree can be selected, and the expectation level when the second announcement effect is the second identification mode is the expectation when the first announcement effect is the second identification mode. The degree of expectation when the second notice effect is set as the first identification mode is made lower than the degree of expectation when the first notice effect is set as the first identification mode.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to one form of this invention, the interference between signal patterns can be suppressed. Also, the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a perspective view of the game machine viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control system of a game machine. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of main processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the main processing; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure game process. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting mouth switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure usual process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big-hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of 2-byte allocation processing; 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of sorting processing; 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure usual processing. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of the production control device. 9 is a flowchart showing received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing; 10 is a flowchart showing single-shot command processing; It is a flow chart which shows design system command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable command processing; It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. FIG. 10 is a table showing an example of the degree of expectation for a big hit with respect to the execution mode of each advance notice effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the identification mode of the first advance notice effect, and is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a display device; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the identification mode of the second advance notice effect, and is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device. FIG. FIG. 10 is a screen transition diagram showing display screens of the display device in chronological order, and is an example (part 1) of screen transition when the advance notice effect is executed during the variable display game. FIG. 10 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device in chronological order, and is an example (2) of screen transition when the advance notice effect is executed during the variable display game. FIG. 10 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device in chronological order, and is another example (part 1) of screen transition when the advance notice effect is executed during the variable display game. FIG. 10 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device in chronological order, and is another example (part 2) of screen transition when the advance notice effect is executed during the variable display game. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device in chronological order, and is a modified example of screen transition when the advance notice effect is executed during the variable display game. FIG. 11 is a modified example of a table diagram illustrating points related to the degree of expectation of a big win for the execution mode of each advance notice effect; FIG. It is a timing chart when a notice effect is applied to a pseudo-continuous effect. It is an example of a timing chart when the production|presentation control apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment performs suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device according to the second embodiment in chronological order, and is an example (part 1) of screen transition when the suggestion effect is executed during the variable display game. FIG. 10 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device according to the second embodiment in chronological order, and is an example (part 2) of screen transition when the suggestive effect is executed during the variable display game. It is the 1st modified example and 2nd modified example of a timing chart when the production|presentation control apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment performs suggestion production|presentation. It is the 3rd modification of a timing chart when the production|presentation control apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment performs suggestion production|presentation. It is the 4th modification of a timing chart when the production|presentation control apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment performs suggestion production|presentation. It is the fifth modification of the timing chart when the effect control device according to the second embodiment executes the suggestive effect It is an example of a timing chart when executing the effect control device suggestion effect according to the comparative example. It is a front view of the game board of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. It is a perspective view of a game board. 46 is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 45; FIG. FIG. 44 is a plan view of the rotator unit (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 44) showing the state of game balls in the rotator unit 800 (No. 1). FIG. 44 is a plan view of the rotator unit (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 44) showing the state of game balls in the rotator unit 800 (No. 2). FIG. 44 is a plan view of the rotator unit (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 44) showing the state of game balls in the rotator unit (No. 3). It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 45 is a plan view (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 44) of a rotor unit that constitutes the first modification of the gaming machine of the third embodiment; FIG. 45 is a plan view (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 44) of a rotating body unit that constitutes a second modification of the gaming machine of the third embodiment; It is a perspective view of the third modification of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a sorting device that constitutes a third modification of the gaming machine of the third embodiment; It is a front view of the 4th modification of the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a first sorting unit that constitutes a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the third embodiment; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a second sorting unit that constitutes a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the third embodiment; It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation|movement of allocating the game ball by a 2nd allocating unit. It is a graph comparing the probability density distribution of the start value of the gaming machine of the third embodiment and the probability density distribution of the start value of the conventional gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates the electric circuit of the periphery of the microcomputer for a game, and each IC chip for drivers. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates the peripheral electric circuit of the microcomputer for a game, and the IC chip for solenoid drivers. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates an electric circuit around a microcomputer for a game and a connector part. It is a figure explaining the wiring example 1 between a connector part and a buffer or a game microcomputer on the board|substrate (main board|substrate) of a game control apparatus. It is a figure explaining the wiring example 2 between a connector part and a buffer or a game microcomputer on the board|substrate (main board|substrate) of a game control apparatus. It is a figure explaining the wiring example 3 between a connector part and a buffer or a microcomputer for a game on the board|substrate (main board) of a game control apparatus. On the board (main board) of the game control device, it is a diagram illustrating a wiring example (modification) when the chip select line is omitted with respect to the wiring example between the connector portion and the buffer or the game microcomputer. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram illustrating an electric circuit (electronic circuit) around a connector section and a serial/parallel conversion circuit on a relay board;

[First embodiment]
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that front, back, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions seen by the player during the game.

[General view of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The game machine 10 has an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to an island facility via a hinge so as to be freely opened/closed. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15 .

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that makes a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back side of the game board 30. can be done.

Various frame-constituting members are arranged on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14 .

At the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 1 capable of emitting light according to the game state are provided.
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house lighting members such as LEDs therein, and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The illumination members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the game machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19a. The lower speaker 19 b is arranged at the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12 . These upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and protrudes forward (toward the player) is arranged. Protruding production unit 1
Reference numeral 3 denotes an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress of the game. Protruding production unit 13
The illumination member disposed inside also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15 . The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball shooting device (not shown).

The upper tray unit further includes a performance operation device for receiving input operations from the players, a ball lending operation device for receiving input operations from the players, and a decoration device 22 for performing light-emitting performance or the like according to the game state. .

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the production button 25,
It is provided in the upper center of the upper tray unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operation device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in a special figure variation display game (game) or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or execute an advance notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game (game) corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Also, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device while the game is not being executed.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a state with a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a time-saving state or a variable display game as a specific game state (variable state, probability variable state), a big hit state (
special game state).

Here, the probability variable state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There is one that continues until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not to generate the probability variable state may be always generated when the big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate the probability variable state by the big hit pattern random number, or a prize winning device having a specific area may be provided and specified. A variable probability state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by the player when borrowing game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball rental operation device includes a ball rental button 27 and a return button 28.
, and a balance display unit 26 . A ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and a return button 28 is used when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These are buttons operated by the player. The balance display portion 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs light emission effect or the like according to the game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper tray unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Beneath the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper tray unit and the like, and below the front frame 12, there are an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball shooting device (not shown) and a game ball capable of being stored. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operating handle 24 is arranged in the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19b. The ball shooting device shoots game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30 when the player rotates the operation handle 24 . The shooting speed of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device is set so as to increase as the rotation amount of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device has a momentum (speed) for launching the game ball into the game area.
can be changed according to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be shot in various shooting modes with different shooting momentum. The shooting modes include left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32 .

The lower tray 23 is arranged below the upper tray unit with a predetermined gap from the upper tray unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a vertically passing through the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball extraction hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball extraction hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 3 that serves as an attachment base for various members.
0a. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin.
A game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front surface of the . The gaming machine 10
A game is played by shooting game balls from a ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31. - 特許庁In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached to form a window portion that serves as a display area for the variable display game. At the rear of the window formed in the center case 40, there is an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information.
A display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40 . The display device 41 is not limited to having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big win display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

In addition, the center case 40 is equipped with a game ball flowing down the game area 32 .
An inflow port 40a to a warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball to the inside and a stage portion 40b on which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize opening 36 and the normal variable prize winning device 37,
A game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is likely to enter the starting prize-winning port 36 or the normal variable prize-winning device 37. - 特許庁

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided in the upper part and the right part of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
constitutes a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board rendering device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

A general prize winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls to these general winning openings 35 is achieved by a winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

In the lower game area 32 of the center case 40, there is provided a start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 that gives the starting condition of the special figure fluctuation display game, and directly below it is a second starting winning opening (second A normal variable winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts into a state in which game balls can easily flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls down toward the near side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game balls cannot win the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加When the game ball wins the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory, and rotates via a normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode. , and changes to an open state in which game balls tend to flow into the normal variable winning device 37 (an easy winning state advantageous to the player).

The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 shortens the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game or increases the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game by making the probability higher than usual, thereby increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy winning state, or normal game state. By making the occurrence time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in , a time saving state (general electric support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific game state. In addition, the variable state (
Even in the latent probability variable state), a time-saving state (general electric support state) will occur.

In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the normal variable winning device 37, there is a large winning opening solenoid 39b (Fig. 3)
), there is provided a special variable winning device 39 having an attacker type open/close door 39c that opens the big winning opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls forward. The special variable winning device 39 converts the state of the large winning opening closed (blocked state unfavorable to the player) to an open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, thereby winning a large prize. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the mouth, predetermined game values (prize balls) are awarded to the player. A count switch 39a (large winning opening switch 39a, see FIG. 3) is arranged in the large winning opening as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening. In addition, a light-emitting member for illuminating the big winning opening is arranged in or near the big winning opening.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39 . When the game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the probability change state (
High probability state, specific game state) is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time only in the case of a variable probability big hit so that the game ball can easily pass through. In addition, the game control device 100 can detect passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) through a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like. While confirming that it does, it transmits information (specific area passing command etc.) indicating that there was a V prize to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 displays the V prize on the display device 4
1 and so on.

General winning port 35, starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37, and special variable winning device 39
When a game ball wins in the big winning hole, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of prize balls from the payout device to the upper tray 21 according to the type of the winning winning hole. In addition, normal variable winning device 3
In the game area 32 below 7, an out port 30 for collecting game balls that did not win a prize such as a prize winning port
b is provided.

In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 for displaying information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display unit 51 (special figure 1 indicator, lamp D1) and a second special figure variation for a variation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) Display unit 52 (special figure 2 indicator, lamp D2), variation display unit 53 for normal figure variation display game (normal figure indicator, lamps D10, D18), start (hold) memory number of each variation display game Storage display unit for notification (special figure 1 reservation indicator 54, special figure 2 reservation indicator 55, general figure reservation indicator 56),
have. The special figure 1 reservation indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. special figure 2
The hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The general map holding display 56 is configured by lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp D8),
A second game state display unit 58 (second game state indicator, lamp D9) which lights up when a time saving state occurs to inform the occurrence of the time saving state, and when the game machine 10 is powered on, the probability state of a big hit becomes a high probability state. 3rd game state display unit 59 (third game state display unit, probability state display unit, lamp D17) for displaying that the game is on, round display for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big win (the number of opening and closing times of the special variable winning device 39) A section 60 (lamps D3-D7) is provided.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are not limited to such segment type display units,
It may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when executing a variable display, all LEDs provided as indicators may be all lit and all extinguished (simultaneous blinking of all LEDs), or cyclic lighting (any One LED may be turned on and off in a predetermined order every predetermined time), or a predetermined number of LEDs out of a plurality of LEDs may be lit and extinguished (blinking) or cyclically lit. Also in the normal figure display device 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the normal figure indicator 53 is also the special figure 1 indicator 5
1. It is possible to configure appropriately in the same manner as the special figure 2 display 52.

In addition, the lamp display device 80 provided on the upper part of the center case 40 is a lamp display unit (flash) that performs a variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as a pattern (fourth special pattern).
LED) and a lamp display unit (LED
). Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later).
The lamp display unit (LED) for notifying the start (reservation) memory number of each special figure fluctuation display game ends the display of the reservation number due to the occurrence of a big hit, but if it is not in the state of a big hit (reach described later on the display device 41 (including cases where is occurring), display the number of pending.

Next, details of the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by shooting game balls toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstructing nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and enters a normal figure start gate 34, a general prize winning opening 35, and a starting winning opening. 36, wins a normal variable winning device 37 or a special variable winning device 39, or flows into an out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. When game balls enter the general winning port 35, the starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is sent through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper tray 21 .

The normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 . When the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal pattern variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state where the normal pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal pattern fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit. When the variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, if the normal pattern start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

The normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value for determining the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and when this hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal pattern fluctuation display A game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed by the normal pattern display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50 . The normal figure display 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a hit in the case of a lit state as normal identification information (normal figure), and indicates a deviation in the case of an off state. After a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal pattern random number value extracted when passing the normal pattern starting gate 34 is a winning value, the normal pattern displayed on the normal pattern display device 53 stops in a winning state and becomes a winning state. At this time, by driving the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game balls to the normal variable winning device 37 Winning is allowed.

Winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and winning to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has won the start prize opening 36 is detected as the start prize ball of the special figure 1 variable display game,
The game balls that have won the normal variable winning device 37 are detected as starting winning balls of the special figure 2 variable display game, and are stored up to the predetermined upper limit.

At the time of detection of the starting prize ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit pattern random number value, each variation pattern random number value, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning memory for each predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The number of memories of the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display 54 and the special figure 2 reservation display 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the display device 4
1 is also displayed on the display screen.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 indicator 51 based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 100, based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory, the special figure 2 on the special figure 2 indicator 52
Run the floating display game.

The special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) are identified by the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( It is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying special symbols, special symbols). again,
In the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (eg, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbols (identification information) composed of the numbers etc. described above are left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol ), the variable display (scroll display) is started in order, and after a predetermined time, the varying symbols are sequentially stopped, and the results of the special figure variation display game are displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of a character to enhance interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), in the lamp display unit (LED) of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol ( 4th pattern) fluctuates. After a predetermined period of time from the start, the variable display on the lamp display stops with "lights on" in the case of a loss, and "lights out" in the case of a big hit.

Conversely, the variable display of the lamp display unit (LED) as the fourth special pattern (fourth pattern) can be configured to stop at "lights off" in the case of a loss and "lights up" in the case of a big hit. . In addition, there is also a configuration in which a plurality of LEDs (fourth pattern LEDs) are provided as each lamp display part, one of the plurality of LEDs is lit in the case of a loss, and all the plurality of LEDs are lit in the case of a big hit. It is possible.

When the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random value at the time of winning detection is a jackpot value), the special figure 1 display 51 or special In the display 52 of FIG. 2, a specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbols as a result of the special figure variation display game, and a big hit state (special game state) is established. In response to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, in the special variable prize winning device 39, the special prize winning port solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) is energized, so that the special prize winning port is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).
In other words, the big winning opening provided in the special variable winning device 39 opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls win, and during this time the player is given the privilege of being able to win a lot of game balls. be.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be configured as separate indicators or may be configured as the same indicator, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. is set to

Regarding the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or the same display may be performed. You may make it perform by a device or a display area. In this case, the decoration special figure variation display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not executed at the same time. In addition, the special figure 2 variation display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, When it becomes possible to execute the figure fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game.

Also, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning port 36
a. The starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch 39a in the normal variable prize winning device 37 are provided with coils for detecting magnetism, and the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when metal comes close to the coils. Non-contact magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used to detect game balls. Also, the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10
A microswitch with a mechanical contact is used for the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided in the etc. and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided in the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. be able to.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10
0 (main board), the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in general, and has a CPU section having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. 110, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130, and the like.

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating an operating clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, a reference clock for the random number generation circuit, and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied and enabled.

The power supply device 400 includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as 12V or 5V from a voltage of 32V DC, and a normal power supply unit 410. , gaming microcomputer 11
It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. and a control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting the .

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate substrate or integrally with the game control device 100, that is, on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 43 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is pressed and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated,
Based on this, the RAM 111c in the game microcomputer 111 and the RA in the payout control device 200
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in M is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1
It is read repeatedly in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Also, the game control device 100 (main board) is provided with a setting key switch 93 . When the setting key switch 93 is turned on by an operator's rotating operation or the like, the probability setting value (setting value) corresponding to the setting regarding the game condition (game) can be changed. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a set value change switch that can change the probability set value according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small win probability (only when there is a small win), but other game conditions other than the probability (such as production) can also be changed according to the probability setting value. Setting key switch 93 and RAM
The initialization switch 112 constitutes setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing settings (probability setting values) relating to game conditions. Instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a unique set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are arranged on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 so that they cannot be operated (positions inaccessible) unless the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. be done. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 .

As will be described later, when the game machine 10 is turned on (recovery from power failure, power recovery), the game machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the ON/OFF states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which probability setting values can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined, for example, in six stages, and probability setting value 1 (setting 1
), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player and setting 6 is the most favorable setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the working setting value (setting) in the working setting value area is changed to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1).
→ setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (
Setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → It is changed as follows. Thus, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For the convenience of explanation, work set values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to probability set values 1 to 6, respectively, in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work set values and probability set values are the same. They may be treated as the same by aligning them to a numerical range (ie, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (making the working set value and the probability set value the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to six stages. The performance display device 152, which is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display, displays the probability setting values for display corresponding to the selected working setting values 0 to 5, for example. etc.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111c.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores constant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area for the CPU 111a during game control and as a storage area for various signals and random numbers. can be held and stored. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information This state (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the ready-to-win state.

The ready-to-win state includes a plurality of ready-to-win effects, and normal reach (N reach), normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP
2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach.
The degree of expectation (expected value) of the big hit increases in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Also, the ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when the game becomes a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is lost). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state has occurred is a state with a high possibility of winning a big hit compared to the case in which the ready-to-win state has not occurred.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, and a small hit pattern for determining a small hit pattern. Pattern random numbers (only if there is a small hit), fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in various reach and fluctuation display without reach) A random number generation circuit for generation and an oscillation signal from the oscillation circuit 113 (
A clock generator is provided for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a based on the original clock signal) and a clock for giving the update timing of the random number generation circuit.

In addition, the CPU 111a uses the ROM 111b in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111a, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the number of starting memories Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the above. Here, the CPU 11
1a constitutes variation distribution information acquiring means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111b when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to produce a prize ball. control to pay out
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game control device 100 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal figure start gate 34, a start opening 1 in the first start winning opening 36 It is connected to the switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second start winning port 37 (normal variable winning device), the winning port switch 35a of the general winning port 35, and the large winning port switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39. The high level supplied from the switch is 11
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided for inputting a negative logic signal such as V and a low level of 7V and converting it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 and the out ball detection switch 74 . Specific area switch 72
detects the passage of the game ball (V winning) to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects game balls that have passed through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging game balls from the special variable winning device 39 . The out-ball detection switch 74 may detect only game balls passing through the out port 30b, or may detect all game balls that have been shot into the game area and finished playing.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and read into the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 , or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126 .

Further, the second input port 123 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the glass frame opening detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. Switch 63, a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., vibration sensor 6 for detecting vibration of game machine 10
5 is input.

Also, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is processed by the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating payout abnormality, a shoot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. Overflow switch signal, touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, RAM initialization switch 1
A first input port 122 is provided for taking in a signal from 12 and supplying it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via a data bus 140 . The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 is filled with a predetermined amount or more of game balls (that the tray is full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal that is output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (body frame). This is a signal indicating whether or not

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST noise-removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111, and the output section 13
0 to each port. In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output section 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as

Also, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RST is applied to the ports 122 and 123 of the input section 120.
, 124. The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that it is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and signals of ports selectively controlled by the signal CE are supplied to the test-firing apparatus.

The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (universal electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variable winning device 37, a large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid) for opening the special variable winning device 39, A second output port 134 is provided for outputting opening/closing data for the lever solenoid 86b that operates the lever to open the specific area 86. As shown in FIG.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . ON/ON of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting OFF data.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game parlor, so that information on the game machine 10 can be sent to an external device. It is ready to be fed to the device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 includes a general-purpose solenoid 37 output from a second output port 134.
A first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives an opening/closing data signal for the large winning opening solenoid 39b and the like to generate and output a solenoid drive signal, and a current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. A second driver 138b for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line, a third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, Fifth output port 13
7 outputs to an external information terminal 71 an external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device.
A driver 138d is provided.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the collective display device 50
DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via a digit line. L selected sequentially with
A power supply voltage flows through the ED to light it up. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code, etc.) output from the second output port 134, and outputs a performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 is provided for driving. In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including dots Dp) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. is not limited to

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board).
It may be provided in other places. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability setting value, a role ratio, a ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls as the performance display.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls).
is the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning hole (the number of winning prizes) and the number of game balls that have passed through the out hole 30b. The number of ejected balls is counted by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 etc.
can be obtained by In this embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning opening 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2
), and a special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening).

The ball output rate is the ratio (percentage) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of fired balls),
Number of acquired balls / number of discharged balls) x 100 (%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of winning balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

For example, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering a prize slot for a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (=so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role) obtained by winning the big prize mouth. In addition, the role ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big win state and the small win state) obtained by winning the big prize hole out of the total number of prize balls (= big prize hole ratio). , or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) (= the so-called role ratio (total role ratio )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 4
2 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10. FIG.

The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 .

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure.
A RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that forms a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year/month/day, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 .

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes a command from the game microcomputer 111 , determines the content of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video,
It performs processing such as instructing playback sound to, lighting decorative lamps, driving control of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM and a wait to notify that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Command I/F3
Via 31, received decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from game control device 100 to production control device 300 as production control command signal (production command). . The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40).
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in the game. Note that the board decoration device 46 includes the lamp display device 8 described above.
0 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built into the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor inside the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the initial position etc. and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers.

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . In addition, DC-
A DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
The CPU 111a of the 00 game microcomputer 111 extracts a random value for determining a hit in a normal game based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal game starting gate 34, and stores it in the ROM 111b. It is compared with the judgment value that is set, and the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is judged.

Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the normal pattern display device 53, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is displayed in a stopped manner. When the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal pattern display device 53, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is held for a predetermined time (for example, , 0.3 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display device 53 is controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game big hit determination The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, the start memory is stored, and based on the start memory, the random value for judging the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 2 variation display game.

And CPU111a of the game control apparatus 100 outputs the control signal (production|presentation control command) containing the determination result of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a special figure 2 fluctuation display game to the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, a special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). form.

Also, the effect control device 300 displays a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100 . Furthermore, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, and generates a special game state. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 is opened by the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to enable the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the big winning opening. 1 round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) control (cycle game) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (variable state) is
It is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time reduction state, control is performed to put the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 in the time reduction operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 per unit time is higher than when the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. is controlled so that the opening time of the is substantially increased, so it becomes a general electricity support state.
In addition, even in the high-probability state (normal probability state) except for the latent probability state, the normal power supply support is performed in a time-saving state.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time)
to a second variable display time that is shorter than the normal first variable display time (eg, 10000 msec becomes 1000 msec). In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is also shortened than usual, and the time shortening variation of the special figure variation display game is also performed.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the normal pattern stop time to display the results of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is the first
A second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than the stop time (eg 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so that

In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a win and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec) to be longer.

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the number of openings of the general electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of openings to (eg, 4 times). In addition, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern variation display game (normal pattern probability) higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the open state by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern open number of times, the normal pattern open time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thus, in the time-saving state, winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure variable display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal game state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. Also, in the normal operating state, the movable member 3
It may be set so as not to open 7b (normal pattern probability is 0). Alternatively, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected when a win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transitional state at power-on]
As described above, it shifts to four states (modes) depending on the ON/OFF states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on.

When the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed is entered. (see A1027-A1036 in FIG. 5B and FIG. 6B).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is entered (Fig. 5B A1031-A1036 and FIG. 6B).

When the power is turned on, although the setting key switch 93 is off, the RAM initialization switch 11
2 is turned on, transition to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode);
AM initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 5B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) is entered and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 which is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be explained. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. FIG. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A****".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address ranges from 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal for prohibiting the firing and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal for prohibiting the shooting, the shooting permission signal is set to a prohibited state, and the shooting of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power delay timer (A1007). A game control device 1 serving as main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in a power delay timer
00 to perform various controls according to the instructions from the sub-control means (e.g., payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) to wait until the program is normally started (e.g., 3
seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and the sub-control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 3
00 etc.) for setting a predetermined waiting time for waiting for activation.

In addition, the power supply delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area,
Since it is not necessary to perform calculation while excluding the AM region, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated when the power is turned on.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the standby time starts, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to keep operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, even without performing such troublesome operations, a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed when the power is turned on can be prevented. can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the timing of the waiting time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the waiting time (from A1008 to A
1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus, and determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). If a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), wait until the game machine is powered off.

If the game control device 100 does not have a power failure (result of A1008 is "N")
, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1009), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), the game control device 100
), that is, when the standby time is over, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (no output state). (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1013 ).

Further, the driver 150 that drives the performance display device 152 (status display device) may be initialized here. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the content of the initial settings to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150 . For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of performance display device 152 . The game control device 100 sets the number of digits to be used for the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the game control device 100 generates a CTC (Counter/Timer C) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
ircuit) Activate the circuit (A1014). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a CP based on the frequency-divided signal.
For U111a, there is provided a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that provides a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a random number update trigger that is supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Then, the game control device 100, RAM (here RAM111c) indicating the abnormality of RA
The M abnormality flag is set (A1015). Here, a flag indicating an anomaly is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). And if it is normal (A101
6 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, the game control device 100, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1017 is "Y"), the checksum for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area (for example, game control work area) in the RWM Calculation processing is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at power-off (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal, indicating that the RAM is abnormal.
Clear the abnormal flag (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

In addition, the game control device 100, if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N", or the result of A1017 is "N"), if the checksum does not match (the result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 uses the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112
are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process during probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037. .

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 resets the RAM (RAM
111c) is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag indicating the abnormality is set (A102).
2). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), step A103
1-Probability setting confirmation process in A1037 (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) in steps A1041-1044, or step A1
041, A1045, and A1046 are executed when the power is turned on (when the power is restored).

Game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023
result is "Y"), a command of main abnormality error notification for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024)
. The effect control device 300 that has received the command of the main abnormality error notification is the game control device 10
0 anomaly is notified.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 displays the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped ("E1
error display data) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 so as to be displayed on the performance display device 152 (A1025). Then, ON data of a security signal for notifying the abnormality to an external device (playground internal management device (hall computer), information collection terminal, etc.) is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even if the information about the big win remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big win signal are kept off. After that, the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 1) is performed again.
12) and wait for the power to be turned on. It should be noted that, while waiting to repeat the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 and waiting, the interrupt remains prohibited (A1001), timer interrupt processing that can execute special figure 1, 2 game processing and general figure game processing (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, games (special figure fluctuation display game, normal figure fluctuation display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, setting change operations (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112
If the probability setting changing flag is set even though the two ON operations are not executed, it is assumed that there is an abnormality, and the processing of A1024 to A1026 is executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation is not performed. be.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102
The result of 2 is "Y"), the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7 segments when the game is stopped. Display data (error display data of "E1" in FIG. 9C) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and in order to inform the external device of the RAM abnormality, the security signal ON data is sent to the external device. Output to the information terminal 71 (A1026). It should be noted that, in the same manner as described above, even if the information about the big win remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big win signal are kept off. Then step A10
25 and A1026 are repeated to wait.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). If the RAM error flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y
”), since it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared to the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value “1”), and then (A1028 ), set the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed (
A1029). If the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N
'), the probability setting change flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029).
Next, a command during probability setting change is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1
030), the process proceeds to step A1034. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command of changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being changed on the display device 41 or the like.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirming (setting confirming state) process starts. A probability setting confirming flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the production control device 30
0 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command of changing the probability setting informs that the probability setting is being confirmed on the display device 41 or the like.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processing during probability setting change and during probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation (A1034). The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (FIG. 6B) described later. The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interruption (A1035). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). If the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. on the other hand,
If a power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "Y"), steps A1055-A10
61 is executed when a power failure occurs.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and no power failure has occurred, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036
The result is "Y"), prohibits the interruption (A1038), and transmits a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1039). In addition, the effect|presentation control apparatus 300 which received the command of the information completion|finish complete|finishes the information that it is during probability setting confirmation or probability setting change.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed (A1040). If the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting has been changed so far, RAM initialization processing (described later) of steps A1042 to A1044 is executed. do. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting has been confirmed until now, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored) normal processing.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041).
. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (result of A1041 is "Y"), RA
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is set to 0.
Clear (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability set values stored in the probability set value area. Furthermore, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. In addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to configure such that the stack area and unused area are not cleared, and the work area and stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared. . The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning. be.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to production control device 300 (production control board) (A1044), it moves to the processing of step A1047.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (A1
041 result is "N"), the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are both off, so normal power-on (power recovery) processing is started, and power failure recovery processing is executed ( A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of restoration from power failure (at the time of power restoration) is saved in the area to be initialized. In addition, the above-mentioned probability setting confirming flag is also cleared here. Next, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1046), step A10
47 is processed.

In addition, the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command for power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of game machine, special figures 1 and 2 pending Decoration special figure 1 reservation number command and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command indicating the number, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and time saving state, special figure fluctuation in predetermined production mode It includes a number-of-effects information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on.

Furthermore, the command for RAM initialization and the command for power failure recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information commands) are included. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the setting value information command to the production control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the production control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The command for RAM initialization includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command is, for example,
A customer waiting demonstration is displayed on the display device 41, and RAM
Notification of initialization (RAM clearing) is performed for 30 seconds. Further, the command for restoration from power failure includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41 . In addition, the command for specifying the screen is during normal processing for both special figures 1 and 2 (when neither fluctuating nor hitting)
, is a customer waiting demo command, otherwise it is a recovery screen command.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (C
The CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the TC update permission register). Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit permutation pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to set them arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers Initial value (big hit design initial value random number), initial value of small hit design random number that determines the small hit design (small hit design initial value random number) (only if there is a small hit), hit random number that determines the hit of the general design Initial value (hit initial value random number), initial value of falling lottery random number used in falling lottery (falling lottery initial value random number), etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of RWM as a start value (A1048),
Allow interrupts (A1049). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and destroying the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. there is however,
The jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU. CTC output with the same period (CTC of timer interrupt processing (
It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on a CTC (CTC2)) that is different from CTC0).

In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, the winning pattern random number, and the falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. ing. Note that each random number may be updated by a counter with +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one round is completed. In other words, the jackpot random numbers are random numbers updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random numbers, winning random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1051), and executes performance display editing processing for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, performance information (accessory ratio, payout rate, etc.) may be calculated. Also, when the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). After that, the interrupt is permitted (A1053). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power outage has occurred (A1054).
If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1054 is "N"), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processing of steps A1050 to A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process at the time of power failure, temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports ( 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A
1058). Further, checksum calculation processing is executed to calculate the checksum when the RWM is powered off (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060).
. Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6A is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main process to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process, it becomes equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. Note that when the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, takes in signals,
That is, an input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being checked (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A1304 is "Y"), probability setting change/confirmation processing for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

If the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (A130
4 result is "N"), based on the output data set in various processes, output for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (for example, big winning opening solenoid 39b) and driving control of LEDs (light emission control) Processing is executed (A1306). Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1307), further random number update process 1 (A1308), random number update Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, monitor whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a, and monitor errors (front frame and glass frame open) (A1310
).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether abnormal ejection of game balls is occurring in the big winning opening (A1311). If the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318), which will be described later, it can be determined that abnormal discharge is occurring. If the abnormal discharge is occurring (the result of A1311 is "Y"), the processing from step A1315 onwards is executed.

The game control device 100, when abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is "N")
, Special figure game processing for performing processing relating to the special figure variation display game is executed (A1312). Details of the special figure game processing will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern game processing for performing processing related to the normal pattern fluctuation display game (A1313). A segment LED editing process is executed to drive the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired content (A1314).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes magnet fraud monitoring processing for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and determining whether or not there is an abnormality (A1315). Furthermore, the radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1316).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes vibration fraud monitoring processing for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, an abnormal ejection monitoring process for monitoring abnormal ejection from the big winning opening is executed (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, abnormal discharge of the special variable prize winning device 39 is performed based on inputs from the special variable prize winning device 39 from the large winning prize opening switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V winning prize opening switch), and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73. is monitored, and an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge occurs. It should be noted that the game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 is the specific area switch 7
2 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 is discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes external information editing processing for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1319). Then, performance display monitor control processing for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1320). After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

When the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank designation are automatically performed. Alternatively, a process of returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirm process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2
401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

Game control device 100, when the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "
Y"), set the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value (A2402), and output it to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), set the light-off data as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and output it to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A
2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data of probability setting values for display displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among hall officials, etc., if the probability setting values are different but the same big hit probability (and small win probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the big win probability (and small win probability). can be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big win probability (and small win probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is set to 1 in step A1034.
28 ms (predetermined time). Subsequently, the external information terminal 71 outputs ON data of a security signal for informing an external device (game hall internal control device (hall computer), etc.) of the abnormality.
(A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are kept off.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (A2407
result is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

Game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407
result is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

If the game control device 100 is not the first timer interrupt process after turning on the power (A240
8 is "N"), it is determined whether or not there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2
409). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated.

When there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112, the game control device 100 (A2409
result is "Y"), the work set value in the work set value area (in the RAM 111c or register) is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5, and the probability in the probability set value area corresponding to the work set value The set values 1 to 6 are updated by +1 (A2410). As a result, the RAM initialization switch 112
Each time is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. When entering the setting change mode, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read out from the probability setting value area (1 subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated corresponding to the update of the working setting value. The probability setting value (setting value for work) during setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change operation is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y").
”), a value corresponding to the work set value in the work set value area may be stored in the probability set value area for the first time. In this way, if a power failure occurs while changing settings (A1037
result is "Y"), the probability setting value (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, performance control, etc. can be prevented from being changed by an unintended value.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1312) in the above timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special game processing. In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in a starting winning opening 36 or a normal variable winning device 37 forming a second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and special figure fluctuation display is performed based on the winning. A game result pre-determination is performed to determine a game result based on a prize winning at a stage before the start of the game. note that,
The details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a big winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of game balls by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the big winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
is subtracted) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100, when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "
Y"), that is, if the time is up or has already timed up, the special game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special game process number is set in the register (A2605). . Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made by the special game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the special game processing number (A2607).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A2607, the game control device 100
To monitor the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, set the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, set the effect, and set the information necessary for processing during the special figure fluctuation. Execute (A2608). In addition, the detail of a special figure usual process is later mentioned in FIG.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A2607, the game control device 100
And the setting of the stop display time of the special figure, the processing during the special figure fluctuation which performs the setting of the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure display is executed (A2609). For example, in the special figure fluctuation process, set the necessary information such as a symbol stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol and the stop display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and set the processing number "2" related to the special figure display process Set and save in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "2" at step A2607, the game control device 100
To set a fanfare command according to the type of the big win, set a fanfare time according to the opening pattern of the big win for each big win, and perform processing during the fanfare/interval if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big win. Executes special figure display processing for setting necessary information etc. (A2610). For example, in special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, necessary information such as a fanfare command and fanfare time is set, and processing number "3" related to fanfare/interval processing is set. and save it in the special game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit, the processing number "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A2607, the game control device 100
Fanfare/interval processing for setting the opening time of the big winning opening, updating the number of openings, and setting information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is executed (A2611). For example, in the fanfare/interval processing, the necessary information such as the round command corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the big winning opening are set, and the processing number "4" related to the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Set and save in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A2607, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the processing of setting the ending command, and the processing of setting the information necessary for the processing of the remaining balls of the big winning gate, etc. Open the big winning gate. Intermediate processing is executed (A2612). For example, in the large winning opening open process, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command is set, the processing number "5" relating to the large winning opening remaining ball processing is set, and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" at step A2607, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged, and the jackpot remaining ball processing to set the information necessary to perform the jackpot end processing. Execute (A2613). For example, in the process during the opening of the big winning opening, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the processing number "3" related to the fanfare/interval processing is set in the special game processing number area. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special game processing timer area, the processing number "6" relating to the jackpot end processing is set, and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "6" at step A2607, the game control device 100
Execute the jackpot end processing to set the information necessary for executing the special figure normal processing (A
2614). For example, in the jackpot end process, based on the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number (jackpot pattern number) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state after the jackpot state and the general electric support state after the jackpot state ( Time saving state) and other necessary information is set, the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area. The probability fluctuation judgment data includes the probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the jackpot state, and the number of continuous games (time reduction fluctuation number, electric support number) in the general electric support state (time saving state) after the jackpot state. ) information is included.

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (A2615), then the special figure 1 indicator 51 is executed (A2616). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A2617), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is executed (A2618).

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start-up switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a prize-winning monitoring table for the starting prize-winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2701), executes hardware random number acquisition processing (A2702), and executes the starting prize-winning port 36.
(A2703). If there is no winning to the starting winning port 36 (
If the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the start winning port 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether it is during the special figure time saving (during the general electricity support state) (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during the special figure time saving (during the general electricity support state) (A
If the result of step A2704 is "N"), the processing after step A2707 is executed. On the other hand, if it is during special figure time saving (during general electricity support state) (result of A2704 is "Y"), prepare a right-handed instruction notification command as a production command (A2705), and execute production command setting processing ( A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. - 特許庁

That is, if it is in the general electricity support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state/low probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the production command setting process is executed. . In the case of this embodiment, it is easier to win a prize in the starting prize-winning port 36 with a left-handed hit, and a right-handed hit in the normal variable prize-winning device 37 does not win a prize. Moreover, the game ball does not pass through the normal figure start gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the general electricity support state (time saving state), right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but if there is a prize at the start winning opening 36 during the general electricity support state (that is, during the general electricity support state In the case of hitting to the left), a hitting to the right instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 instructs to hit to the right (
warning) is executed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2
708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), hardware random number acquisition processing is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning to the second starting winning opening is determined. Judge (A2711). If there is no prize to the 2nd start prize gate (
When the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric accessory (normal variable prize winning device 37) is in operation when there is a prize to the second start prize winning port (the result of A2711 is "Y"). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"
), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), determines whether the normal electric fraud is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that general electrical fraud is occurring. The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) when the electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , Executes the special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2715), and ends the starting opening switch monitoring processing. Also, if it is determined in A2713 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second
Prevents further generation of starting memories.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the special figure start switch common processing in the start switch monitoring process (A2708, A
2715) will be described in detail. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. Special figure starting opening switch common processing, when there is an input of starting opening 1 switch 36a or starting opening 2 switch 37a, is processing that is performed in common for each input.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information about the number of winnings to the monitored starter switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a to a management device outside the gaming machine 10. is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"),
Save the updated value in the starting signal output count area of RWM (A2904), step A
2905 processing is performed. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output count area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, the game control device 100, of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the update target special figure holding number (starting memory number) corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is less than the upper limit (A2905). If the special figure pending number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) + 1 update Then (A2906), the target starting gate winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (A2912), and executes special figure reservation information determination processing (A2
913). In the special figure reservation information determination process, the pre-reading stop symbol command corresponding to the stopped symbol information based on the saved jackpot random numbers and jackpot random numbers, and the first half variation number based on the saved variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (pre-reach variation number) And set the look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the second half variation number (number of post-reach variation) as a production command. Then, prepare the decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations as a production command (A2914), execute the production command setting process (A2915), and common the special figure starting opening switch End the process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning region of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It constitutes a start memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory. again,
The starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning port (starting winning port 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit. , Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is 0 (A3206). Then, if the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3211), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (A3211 is "N"), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3212).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as an effect command (
A3213), effect command setting processing is performed (A3214), and the process proceeds to step A3215. On the other hand, in step A3211, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (A32
The result of 11 is "Y"), and set "0" related to special figure normal processing as the processing number (A3215
), save the processing number in the special game processing number area (A3216), and clear the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3217). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N
”), execute the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202), prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number as a production command (A3203
), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3204). Then, the processing shift setting processing during the special figure fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and the special figure usual processing is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N
”), execute the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207), prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number as a production command (A3208
), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3209). Then, the processing transition setting processing during special figure fluctuation of special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and the special figure usual processing is ended.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the special figure 1 reservation number check, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) is executed The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game. That is, the game control device 100 is the second start storage means (game control device 100)
If there is a second starting memory in the second starting memory, priority control means for executing the variable display game based on the second starting memory preferentially over the variable display game based on the first starting memory.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207) in the special figure usual process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3401). Subsequently, a jackpot flag 1 setting process for setting deviation information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a jackpot is executed (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) relating to the special figure 1 variable display game (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop design setting process, the stop design number at the time of loss or at the time of the big hit and the loss stop design pattern or the big hit stop design pattern corresponding to this stop design number are saved. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as a production command, and production command setting processing is executed. In addition, it acquires and saves round number information (round upper limit value) corresponding to the stop design number and probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop design number.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405 ).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number) which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).
. Next, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is performed. Also, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the special figure pending number related to the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure variation display game to be started is updated by -1 (decrease by 1).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure usual process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 11 is performed for the second start memory. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first determines the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
To save the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating to the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) relating to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A3503). Furthermore, the special figure information setting processing which sets the special figure information which is the parameter in order to set fluctuation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Finally, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area (A36
01). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1), prepared (A3602), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3603). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, big-hit determination processing is executed to determine whether or not the game is a big-hit (A3604).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3604) is a big hit (the result of A3605 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 1 area where the losing information is saved in step A3601 with the big hit information. Save (A3606) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (A3605) is not a big hit (A
The result of 3605 is "N"), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is either "big hit" or "loss".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.
This process performs the same process as the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 13 for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 2 area (A37
01). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1), prepare (A3702), and clear the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number 1 reservation) to 0. (A3703). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, big-hit judgment processing is executed to judge whether or not the game is a big-hit (A3704).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701 with the big hit information. Save (A3706) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (A3704) is not a big hit (A
If the result of 3705 is "N"), the process of setting the big hit flag 2 is finished while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is either "big hit" or "loss".

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the big hit determination process in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process (
A3605, A3704) will be described in detail. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. It should be noted that the big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes performed during the timer interrupt process, and is also performed in step A3004 of the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value (A3801), and judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3802). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

The game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A380
The result of 2 is "Y"), set a failure (other than a big hit) as the judgment result (A3807), and end the big hit judgment processing.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (A3
The result of 802 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is in a high probability state (variable probability state) (A3803). Then, if it is in a high-probability state (the result of A3803 is "Y"
), and sets the upper limit judgment value in the high probability (A3804). On the other hand, if it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3803 is "N"), the upper limit determination value for low probability is set (A3805).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the jackpot random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (A3806). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is "Y"), the decision result is set to be a failure (other than the jackpot) (A3807). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3806 is "N"), and a big hit is set as the determination result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, special figure information setting processing (A340
4, A3504) will be described in detail. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In this embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability, with/without time saving) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, but the production mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. One production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the like.

The game control device 100 first sets the first half variation group selection pointer table (A
4201), acquire the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the production mode information (A4
202). Next, set the first half variation group selection offset table (A4203)
, To acquire the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) and the stop design pattern (A4204).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 1 area (A4206
). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of loss, so in cases other than loss, the number of holds does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. A variation group includes multiple variation patterns, and when determining a variation pattern, first select a variation group, and then select one variation pattern from this variation group. ing.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the second half variation group selection pointer table (A
4207), acquire the second half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the presentation mode information (A4
208). Next, set the second half fluctuation group selection offset table (A4209)
, Acquire the offset data corresponding to the target special figure pending number and the stop symbol pattern (A42
10).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the second half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (A4212
), to end the special figure information setting process. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, only in the case of loss, the rate of reach changes according to the number of holds (the rate of reach is lower when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than losses, the number of holds is distributed in the second half as a result. does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, variation pattern setting processing (A
3406, A3506) will be described in detail. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation form from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half fluctuation pattern is set, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets the variable group selection address table (A430
1) Acquire the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to fluctuation distribution information 2, prepare it (A4302), and load fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) , prepare (A4303). In this embodiment, the structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the size is 1 byte for winning, and 2 bytes for losing. Since the probability of winning is lower than the probability of losing, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the size of the winning is 1 byte from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used at the time of winning. In addition, since the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning, and it is desired to produce more diverse effects, the size for losing is set to 2 bytes.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure variation display game is a loss (A4304), and if it is a loss (the result of A4304 is "Y"), performs 2-byte distribution processing (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. Also, if it is not lost (the result of A4304 is "N"), sorting processing (A4306) is performed, and step A
The processing of 4307 is performed.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the address of the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution, prepares (A4307), and stores the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding (for formula 1) to load the variation pattern random number 2 and prepare (A4308). Then, the allocation process is executed (A4309), the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired, and saved in the second half variation number area (A4310). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the variation allocation information 1 and the second half variation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (A4313), and the fluctuation pattern random number from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) 3 is loaded and ready (A4314). after that,
Perform the allocation process (A4315), acquire the first half variation number obtained as a result of allocation, save it in the first half variation number area (A4316), and end the variation pattern setting process. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte allocation process (A4305) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. 2
The byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not the head data of the selection table (second half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without sorting (that is, "0") (A4401). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores predetermined sorting values in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table.
In the second half fluctuation group table that defines only the second half fluctuation selection table that becomes "no reach" (for example, some fluctuation group tables when the result is lost), there is no need for sorting, so the sorting value is "0" , that is, a code without sorting is specified at the top.

Then, if the leading data of the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result. (A4407) to end the 2-byte allocation process. On the other hand, if the top data of the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is not a code without sorting (the result of A4402 is "N"), one sorting specified first in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) Get the value (A4403).

Subsequently, the distribution value obtained in step A4403 is subtracted from the random value prepared in step A4303 (value of variation pattern random number 1) to calculate a new random value (A4404).
, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), the address of the next distribution value is updated (A4406), and then the process proceeds to step A4403. The following processing is performed. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the previous step A4405
Calculate a new random number by subtracting the sorting value from the random number that has already been judged (A44
04), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

In step A4405, the above process is judged to be smaller than "0" (A4
Execute until the result of 405 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the second half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection tables (second half fluctuation group tables). Then, if it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result is updated (A4407), and 2 bytes End the sorting process.

[Distribution process]
Next, distribution processing (A4306, A4309, A43
15) will be described in detail. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sorting processing. In the distribution process, based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( It is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

The game control device 100 first selects the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). is a code for no sorting (that is, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), or first half variation pattern (first half variation number). However, in the case of a selection table that does not require sorting, the sorting value "0", that is, a code indicating no sorting is specified at the head.

Then, the game control device 100, when the top data of the target selection table (the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4502 is "Y"), The address of the data corresponding to the sorting result is updated (A4507), and the sorting process ends. On the other hand, if the head data of the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) is not a code without sorting (the result of A4502 is "N"), the target selection table (
A first sorting value specified in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table) is obtained (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the sorting value obtained in step A4503 from the random numbers prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314 (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, and variation pattern random number 3). to calculate a new random number (A45
04), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505).
Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"),
After updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the process moves to step A4503 and the subsequent processes are performed.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the randomness determined in the previous step A4505 A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). In step A4505 of the above process, the new random number is set to "0
” (the result of A4505 is “Y”). As a result, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), or first half fluctuation pattern (first half Any one of the second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from among the variation numbers).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), it updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result. (A4507), the sorting process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting process (A
3407, A3507) will be described in detail. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area for the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (A4603). Furthermore, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (A4
605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A460
6), save the added value in the special game processing timer area (A4607). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A4609), and effect command setting processing is performed (A4610). ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag is updated by -1 (A4611), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. i.e.
The game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game A variation command containing information about a pattern and a stop information command containing information about extension of stop time are mentioned, and a command is transmitted to production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general-purpose game process. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, and the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled.
Set the display of the normal map, etc.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes general electric winning switch monitoring processing for monitoring input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the normal game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
is subtracted) (A7603). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

Game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or has already timed up, to the normal game processing number A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number based on the set general-purpose game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the general-purpose game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the general-purpose game processing number (A7607).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A7607, the game control device 100
Monitor the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, set the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, set the effect, and set the information necessary for processing during normal pattern fluctuation. Execute (A7608). The details of the general/universal pattern normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 22 .

In addition, when the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern fluctuation processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern display processing ( A7609). For example, in the process during normal map fluctuation, in order to shift to the process during normal map display, set "2" as the game processing number and save it in the normal map game processing number area, Save in the processing timer area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 The setting of opening time and the processing during the normal diagram display that performs the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the normal diagram per is executed (A7610). For example, in the normal pattern display processing, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, in order to shift to the normal pattern winning process, "3" is set as the game processing number and the normal pattern game processing number area is set. On the other hand, in the case of a failure, in order to shift to the normal game process, the game process number is set to "0" and saved in the normal game process number area.

Further, if the game processing number is "3" at step A7607, the game control device 100 continues the processing during normal game winning, or sets information necessary for performing normal electric remaining ball processing. Processing during drawing is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal per game process, after setting for opening the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined number of times, "4" is set as the game process number to shift to the normal electric remaining ball process. Save in normal game processing number area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "4" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal electric remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing normal per pattern end processing (A7612 ). For example, in the normal electric remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the end processing for the normal game, set "5" as the game processing number and save it in the normal game processing number area, and the normal game ending time Save in the processing timer area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "5" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern per end processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern normal processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the end processing for the general pattern, in order to shift to the normal processing for the general pattern, "0" is set as the game processing number and saved in the general pattern game processing number area.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device 53 (A7614). After that, a symbol variation control process relating to control of variation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is not 0 (A7604
result is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired, the processing from step A7614 onwards is executed.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose normal processing (A7608) in the general-purpose processing will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general/universal figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the normal pattern reservation number is 0 (A7901).
. When the number of general patterns pending is 0 (the result of A7901 is "Y"), the general pattern normal processing transition setting process 1 is executed (A7923), and the general pattern normal processing is terminated. Normal figure normal process transition setting process 1
Then, in order to shift to the normal game process, the game process number is set to "0" and saved in the normal game process number area.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the number of normal pattern reservations is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "
N"), load the hit random number from the RWM hit random number storage area (for the reserved number 1),
Load the hit pattern random number from the general pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A7902)
. And, the random number storage area per normal pattern (for the number of reservations 1) and the random number storage area per normal pattern (for the number of reservations 1
) is cleared to 0 (A7903). In addition, whether or not the probability of a hit result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is higher than normal (in a high probability state), that is, the time saving state (
(A7904). In addition, the probability per normal pattern in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per normal pattern in the low probability is 0/251.

If the game control device 100 is not in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A7904 is "N"), it sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern low probability (A7905
), if it is in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A7904 is "Y"), set the high probability lower limit judgment value (here 1) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern high probability (A7906), step A7907 to process.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7907). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common during normal pattern high probability and during normal pattern low probability. If the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "Y"), that is,
If not, the process proceeds to step A7909. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "N"), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7908).

The game control device 100 hits when the random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7908 is "
Y"), that is, in the case of a miss, save the miss information in the hit flag area (A7909)
. Furthermore, the losing stop pattern number is set as the normal stop symbol number (A7910), the losing pattern information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (A7911), and the process proceeds to step A7915.

The game control device 100, if the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7908 is "
N"), that is, in the case of a hit, the win information is saved in the hit flag area (A7912), the hit stop design number corresponding to the loaded hit design random number is set (A7913), and the hit corresponding to the hit stop design number is set. The stop symbol information is saved in the normal pattern stop symbol information area (A7914), and the process proceeds to step A7915. It should be noted that there may be several types of hit stop symbols.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal pattern stop symbol area (A791
5) Save the stop pattern number in the test signal output data area (A7916). Next, the general pattern command corresponding to the information related to the general pattern variation display game (especially the hit/loss information of the general pattern variation display game) is prepared as a production command (A7917), and the production command setting process is executed. (A7918). Then, shift the random number storage area per normal pattern (A7919),
After clearing the free space after the shift to 0 (A7920), update the number of normal map reservations by -1 (A7
921).

That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the positions of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 are advanced one by one.
By this process, the values for the general pattern holding number 2 to the general pattern holding number 4 in the general pattern random number storage area are moved from the general pattern holding number 1 to the general pattern holding number 3 in the general pattern random number storage area. It will be done. Then, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 4 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation (A7922),
Terminate normal normal processing. In the normal pattern fluctuation process transition setting process, in order to shift to the normal pattern fluctuation process, "1" is set as the game processing number and saved in the general pattern game processing number area, and the normal pattern fluctuation time is set. Save in the game processing timer area.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production|presentation control apparatus 300 performs by the program for production|presentation control is demonstrated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. Figure 23
2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "B****".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (
B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B
0003), and allow interrupts (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
00, it becomes possible to execute the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command sent from 00.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0
008). The WDT is activated by the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and the CPU 311
to see if it's working properly. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 executes RTC read processing for reading time information from the RTC (real time clock) 338 (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, time information may be read from the RTC 338 at predetermined intervals (for example, every two hours), and it is not necessary to read time information each time the process proceeds to step B0009. When power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, power is turned on to the gaming machine 10), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, steps B0003 and B0004 may be executed between). Effect control device 300 sets a time timer (clock means) for measuring time in the timer area in the RAM,
RT only once when time information is read from RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on
When the time information is read from the C338, the time timer (clocking means) may be adjusted so as to match the time of the RTC338. And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 may perform various processes using the timer for time. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. A production button input process is executed (B0010). continue,
A hall/player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness of LEDs and liquid crystals and sound volume by the person in charge of the game hall (game parlor) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hole/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing for adding and clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, production points are added when the production or operation to which the production points are to be added is executed. For example, information including performance point information is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes random number update processing for updating the random number such as the effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check processing. (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes customer waiting demonstration editing processing for editing and controlling the content of the customer waiting demonstration displayed on the display device 41 (B0015), and changes the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 waiting for customers. The power saving control process to be controlled is executed (B0016).

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. effect display edit processing is executed (B0017). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem if the drawing data can be completed by the VDP 312 within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 msec) of the frame period. Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed, and drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0018).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B
0019). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "N"), the processing of B0019 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes. Instruct screen drawing (B0
020). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when periodic V blanking (image update) is performed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), the frame is switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60th of a second, and the interval may be increased.

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes sound control processing for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling decoration devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) made up of LEDs and the like (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling the effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0023). In the movable body control process, for example, a performance for driving a motor is set.

And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B0008, after finishing the process of above-mentioned B0023. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0023 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-described main process (FIG. 23) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of received commands is 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the command reception counter of the command reception counter area After subtracting the value for the number of commands received (B1103
), and copy the contents of the receive command buffer in the RAM to the command area for analysis (B11
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command reading index by +1 (adds only 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer holds 32 received commands.
It is configured to store up to Received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N ”), and the processing from steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is received by the performance control device 300, the contents of the received command are stored in the received command buffer and at the same time the command reception counter value of the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands by constantly securing an empty area in the received command buffer without performing direct analysis.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1106 is "Y
”), loads the contents of the received command in the command area for analysis (B1107), and executes received command analysis processing for analyzing the contents (B1108). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1110). The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process is terminated.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 24) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 shows the performance control device 30
10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of received command analysis processing executed by .0.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). Commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, MODE section (MODE command) and A
It consists of a CTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower order of the received command are M
It consists of an ODE section and an ACTION section in that order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the normal range (B12
02). That is, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicating the type of command is a value that can be taken (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). Then, if the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
(B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variation command (B1205). In addition, the variation system command is a command for commanding a variation pattern of a decorative special design, for example, there is a variation command (A3407). If the MODE part indicates a variable command (the result in B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a variable command (B12
The result of 05 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the jackpot command (
B1207). The jackpot commands are commands for instructing operations related to the performance during the jackpot (display of a fanfare screen, round screen, etc.). A round command (A2611) for commanding an interval screen, an interval command (A2612) for commanding an interval screen, an ending command (A2612) for commanding an ending screen
A2612), etc. Then, when the MODE part indicates a jackpot command (B1
The result of 207 is "Y"), the big hit system command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a big hit system command (B1
The result of 207 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the pattern-based command (
B1209). The symbol system commands include, for example, decoration special symbol commands (A3403, A3503) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, if the MODE part indicates a pattern-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the pattern-based command process is executed (B1210
), and terminates the received command analysis process.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the pattern system command (B12
09 result is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of single-shot commands (B
1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), single-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a single-shot command, the effect control device 300 (B12
11 result is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (B1213). The look-ahead symbol system command includes, for example, a look-ahead stop symbol command (A2
913). Then, when the MODE part indicates a look-ahead pattern command (B121
The result of 3 is "Y"), the look-ahead pattern-based command processing is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (
The result of B1213 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch variation command (B1215). A look-ahead variation command includes, for example, a look-ahead variation pattern command (A2913). If the MODE part indicates a prefetch variation command (result of B1215 is "Y"), prefetch variation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a prefetch variation command (the result of B1215 is "N"), may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is out of the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is out of the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the AC for the MODE part
Even if the TION part is not a correct combination (the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the procedure of single command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). Then, if the MODE part indicates a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the model designation command, the effect control device 300 (B1
The result of 301 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a command for RAM initialization (B1303). And if the MODE part represents a command for RAM initialization (
If the result of B1303 is "Y"), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the one-shot command processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command of RAM initialization (the result of B1303 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents a power failure recovery command (B1305 ). Then, when the MODE part indicates a power failure recovery command (B13
05 result is "Y"), the power failure restoration setting process is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the power failure recovery command, the effect control device 300 (B1
If the result of 305 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B1307). Then, if the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B130
7 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the single command process is terminated.

If the MODE part does not indicate the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1307 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reserved number command (B1309). Then, if the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), execute the special figure 1 reservation information setting process (B1310),
Ends single-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (B1311). Then, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B131
2) End the one-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1313). Then, when the MODE part represents a probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the probability information command, the effect control device 300 (B1
The result of 313 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (B1315). Error/illegal commands include, for example, a fraud occurrence command, a fraud cancellation command, a state off command, and a state on command. As a state ON command, the generation of a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error) and the generation of a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) (body frame open error, front frame There is a command that indicates an open error). A state off command also indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, if the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is "Y"), error/illegal setting processing for reporting or canceling the notification of error or illegality is executed (
B1316), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), then the MODE part is a command for effect mode switching (processing during special figure display etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE part represents a command for switching the production mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the production mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the number of out balls command indicating the number of out balls It is determined whether or not (B1319). Then, if the MODE part indicates the number of out-balls command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the processing when the number of out-balls is received is executed (B1
320), ending the one-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the out ball number command (B
If the result of 1319 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a count command (large winning opening count command) (B1321). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for counting the big winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the one-shot system command process ends.

If the MODE section does not indicate a count command, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1321 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The setting value information command is executed in step A of FIG. 6B.
It is included in the command 1046 for recovery from power failure and the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. Then, when the MODE part represents a setting value information command (
The result of B1323 is "Y"), the set value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the setting value reception processing, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

If the MODE section does not represent the set value information command, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1323 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a setting change command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, a probability setting change command (A
1030). Then, when the MODE part indicates a setting change command (B13
25 is "Y"), the setting change information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot command process ends. In the setting change system information setting process, the contents of the setting change system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change information setting process, a setting change indication is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being changed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command, the effect control device 300 (
If the result of B1325 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation type command (B1327). As a setting confirmation command, for example, a command during probability setting confirmation (
A1033). When the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation command (B1
The result of 327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the one-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the probability setting confirming command is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a setting confirming display is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicates a symbol stop command (B1329). It should be noted that the symbol stop command, for example, there is a special figure 1 symbol stop command (decoration special figure 1 stop command) and a special figure 2 symbol stop command (decoration special figure 2 stop command). and MODE
If the part represents a command to stop the pattern (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 3
00 then determines whether or not the command in the MODE section is a normal command (B13
30).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (result of B1330 is "Y")
, The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all symbols have stopped (B1332), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to a normal state, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag may be changed to a "fluctuation", "big hit", or "small hit" flag. is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not indicate a symbol stop command (the result of B1329 is "N
”), or if the command in the MODE part is not normal (result of B1330 is “N”)
, the effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may execute processing for commands not described in FIG. 26 .

[Processing of pattern-based commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, details of the pattern-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 receives the pattern system command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2
command) to set the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part (B1801). The special figure classification is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT
part), and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180
2). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the design changes, the table is used for each MODE, and the design type is set. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the design type is a lost design, a 4R probability variation jackpot design (4R-A1, design 1), a 4R normal jackpot design (4R-A2
, Pattern 2), 8R variable jackpot pattern (8R-A1, pattern 3), 8R normal jackpot pattern (8R-
A2, pattern 4), 12R probability variation jackpot pattern (12R-A1, pattern 5), 12R normal jackpot pattern (12R-A2, pattern 6).

[Processing of variable commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable command process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300, special figure type (special figure 1
Or special figure 2) determines whether it is undetermined (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), end the variation system command processing. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), check the combination of the received variation system command and symbol system command (B1902), whether the variation system command and symbol type are inconsistent is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means a contradiction in effecting, for example, when a winning variation command is received but a jackpot symbol symbol command is received. When the fluctuation system command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y")
, to terminate the variable command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the variation system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1
904), a variable effect setting process for setting a variable effect that is a variable effect is executed (B19
05). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to be during special figure fluctuation (B1906), and if the number of read-ahead effects such as continuous effects is 0, it is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 28) described above will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is no reach variation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of production points, model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to special figure type, production mode, setting information (setting value) (B2002), corresponding to the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the number of reservations of special figure type Acquire the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table (B2003
). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the higher the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired.

Effect control device 300, if the variation pattern type is not a change without reach (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if it is a change with reach, the number of points of the effect point, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, A first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and setting information (setting value) is set (B2004), and the variable command (variable command) M
The address of the first half advance notice allocation group table corresponding to the ODE part and the variation pattern type is obtained (B2005).

Effect control device 300, after steps B2003 and B2005, performs a lottery for notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Subsequently, the number of production points, the model code, the special type, the production mode, the pattern type, and the setting information (setting value) are set (B2007), and the ACT of the variation system command is set. The address of the second half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the part is acquired (B2008), and a lottery for the advance notice that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the content of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation command (variation command) is determined (B2010).
In addition, you can see the change time and main reach content from the change command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). After that, the stop pattern of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined according to the content of the variable performance such as the reach performance and the notice performance (B2012). Here, the decoration stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining a loose pattern in the case of a missing pattern.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of variable effect (B2013), and performs display setting of notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting of the pending decrease corresponding to the special figure type is performed, for example, the display that the pending display corresponding to the decorative special figure that changes this time is reduced is set (B201
5). Subsequently, a sound number that determines the mode of presentation (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the mode of presentation by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decoration LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing, etc.) determined by the decoration number. .

Note that it is also possible to set the voice number and decoration number based on setting information (setting values) as well as the effect contents. In this way, the player can enjoy guessing the setting information (set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emission mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the production control device 300 performs the display setting of the decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (B
2017), in addition to the above-described first to third special symbols that fluctuate on the display device 41, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation relating to the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). note that,
The fourth pattern variation is the lamp display unit 1 of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided other than the display device 41.
, 2 (LED), or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41 .

[Mode of execution of notice effect and degree of expectation for big hit]
FIG. 30 explains the execution mode of the advance notice effect and the degree of expectation for the big hit (special result). In the present embodiment, the notice effect is a effect capable of predicting the result of the special figure variation display game, and suggests the degree of expectation (possibility) of a big hit.

FIG. 30 is a table showing an example of the degree of expectation for a big hit with respect to the execution mode of each advance notice effect.

The effect control device 300 executes a first notice effect and a second notice effect performed after the first notice effect as the notice effect. The first notice effect is, for example, a line set to be executed in the first half variation, which is the variation from the start of the variation display game (special figure variation display game, decoration special figure variation display game) to the reach state. It is a notice. Such advance notice of dialogue during the first half fluctuation is drawn by lottery in step B2006 of the above-described fluctuation effect setting process. The second notice effect is, for example, a cut-in notice that is set to be executed in the second half fluctuation, which is the fluctuation from reaching the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. Such cut-in notice during the second half fluctuation is drawn by lottery in step B2009 of the above-described fluctuation effect setting process. It should be noted that, for example, the mode of presentation may be switched, and a cut-in notice may be performed as the first notice effect, and a dialogue notice may be given as the second notice effect. In addition, the production mode of the first notice production and the second notice production is not limited to cut-in notice and dialogue notice, but various production modes such as character appearance production, group notice, button operation promotion production, light emission of decorative members, etc. can be applied.

At that time, the effect control device 300 can change the degree of expectation (reliability) that the stop result mode of the variable display game will be a big hit according to the execution mode of the first notice effect and the second notice effect. In addition, the degree of expectation of the notice effect suggests the probability of winning a big hit when the notice effect is selected, the selection rate of the notice effect when it is a big hit, and the notice effect when it is not a big hit (when you lose) can be calculated based on the selectivity of In this way, by suggesting the degree of expectation to the player in the advance notice effect, the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be heightened, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced. Also, the degree of expectation is expressed as a percentage (0
to 100%), and the advance notice effect with an expectation level of 100% can greatly increase the expectation of the player as a jackpot determination effect. The degree of expectation may be set as a value other than a percentage for each advance notice effect, or may be set as a relative value for each advance notice effect as described later.

The degree of expectation in the first notice effect (for example, speech notice) is 15% when the color of the balloon is green as the first identification mode, and 30% when the color of the balloon is red as the second identification mode. be. Although not exemplified, the third and subsequent identification modes that display colors with a higher degree of expectation may be set. In this way, the color of the speech balloon can be changed according to the degree of expectation, for example, from white, which has a low degree of expectation, to blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow (cherry blossom), which have a high degree of expectation.

The degree of expectation in the second notice effect (for example, cut-in notice) is 30% for the first identification mode (eg, green) and 50% for the second identification mode (eg, red).

Therefore, for example, when the notice of the second identification mode (red) is continuously executed in the first notice effect and the second notice effect, the first notice effect (for example, dialogue notice) is 30%, and the second notice is 30%. The degree of expectation of the second notice effect to be executed later is higher than that of the first notice effect to be executed first, at 50% for the effect (for example, cut-in notice). Therefore, by visually recognizing the latter half of the announcement effect (second announcement effect) with high expectations, the player can increase the expectation of the big hit from the expectation of the second announcement effect (high expectation priority). ). It should be noted that, when the latter half of the advance notice effect occurs, the expectation of the second half notice effect can be used with priority over the expectation of the first half notice effect (second half notice effect priority). By giving priority to the latter half notice effect, regardless of whether or not the stop result of the variable display game results in a big win, the first half notice effect is likely to be highly anticipated and has a premium feeling, and the game is improved. can be of interest.

On the other hand, for example, when the notice of the first identification mode (green) is continuously executed in the first notice effect and the second notice effect, the first notice effect (for example, dialogue notice) is 15%, and the second notice effect is 15%. In the advance notice performance (for example, cut-in notice), the degree of expectation is reversed to 5%, and the degree of expectation for the first notice performance to be executed earlier is higher than the second notice performance to be executed later. Therefore, since the degree of expectation for the first half notice performance (first notice performance) is higher than the expectation degree for the second half notice performance (second notice performance), the player recognizes that the expectation level is high due to the first half notice performance. It will be easier to raise the expectations of people (prioritize high expectations). Therefore, both the first half of the announcement effect and the second half of the announcement effect can easily raise the player's expectation, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, for example, when a rainbow-colored speech balloon as a big hit confirmation effect occurs in the first notice effect, the color of the second notice effect balloon is changed to rainbow color or cherry color to further arouse the player's expectation. may Also, the second notice effect may be canceled (skipped) so that the stop result mode of the variable display game is immediately displayed, so that the player can quickly recognize that a big win has been achieved. .

In addition, the first notice effect and the second notice effect may be performed in any manner as long as the latter half notice effect (second notice effect) is performed after the first half notice effect (first notice effect). , continuous notice (chance notice), step-up notice, and the like. For example, the effect control device 300 can execute the second advance notice effect at the time of change when the hold related to the hold display is terminated after executing the first notice effect using the hold display as the foreseeing notice. The pre-reading notice is the pre-reading pattern command processing (B1214) and the pre-reading variation command processing (B1
216). Further, the effect control device 300 may execute the second notice effect after performing the first notice effect before the temporary stop or the like in the pseudo-continuous variation. The effect control device 300 is the first step of continuous notice and step-up notice (
After performing the first notice effect in the first stage, the first time), the second notice effect may be executed after the first notice effect.

In addition, the step-up notice will change the single production (secondary production) set in multiple stages to the lower stage (
step) to a predetermined stage (predetermined step). The continuous notice (chance notice) is an effect of displaying a common pattern of a different decoration special pattern over a plurality of times of the variable display game. The pseudo continuous effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Specific example of identification mode of first notice effect]
FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the identification mode of the first announcement effect (dialogue announcement), and is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device 41. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 31(A) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device 41 when the first notice effect is performed in the first identification mode (for example, green) during the variable display game, and FIG. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the display device 41 when the first notice effect is performed in the second identification mode (for example, red).

At the upper center of the display screen of the display device 41, a large decorative special pattern (large pattern, first
A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610a, right area 61) in which symbols A to C) are enlarged and displayed
0b, middle region 610c) is located. The decoration first patterns A to C in the variable display area 610 are displayed by variable display “↓↓↓”.

A first pending display portion 630a, a second pending display portion 630b, and a pending digestion area 640 are arranged at the bottom of the display screen of the display device 41. FIG.

The first pending display portion 630a displays a pending display (starting memory display, stock pending) corresponding to the first start memory (special figure 1 start winning memory). For example, in the first pending display portion 630a in FIG. 31A, one pending display 633a relating to the variable display game before execution is displayed. It should be noted that when the next variable display game starts, the suspension display 633a of the first suspension display section 630a
is to the display position of the pending display on the right side, that is, from the first pending display portion 630a to the pending digestion area 6
40 and is displayed as a variable pending display (hold shift).

The second pending display portion 630b displays a pending display (starting memory display) corresponding to the second starting memory (special figure 2 starting winning memory). For example, the second pending display portion 63 at the present time (FIG. 31(A))
0b does not have a hold indication corresponding to the second start memory. It should be noted that the pending display displayed in the second pending display portion 630b is prioritized over the pending display of the first pending display portion 630a when the next variable display game starts, and is shifted to the pending display area 640. do.

A pending digestion area 640 displays a pending display during fluctuation. While the first pending display portion 630a and the second pending display portion 630b display the starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory related to the variation display game before execution, the pending digest area 640 displays the A starting memory display (a pending display during a change, a pending display during digestion) corresponding to the starting memory related to the variable display game is displayed. For example, at the present time (FIG. 31(A)), a variable display game is being executed, so a pending display during variable display corresponding to the variable display game is displayed in the pending execution area 640 .

At the right end of the display screen of the display device 41, a special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 and a special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660 are arranged. In the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650, the number "1
” is displayed, and the number “0” indicating the special figure 2 reservation number is displayed in the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660.

Then, when the production control device 300 executes the first advance notice production, the dialogue notice 724 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 . For example, the speech announcement 724 is an announcement effect consisting of a character and a speech balloon displaying the character's speech "It's a chance!"

As shown in FIG. 31(A), when the balloon of the dialogue notice 724 is green (first identification mode), the degree of expectation in the first notice effect is 15%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31(B), when the balloon of the dialogue announcement 724 is red (second identification mode), the degree of expectation in the first announcement effect is 30%.

[Specific example of identification mode of second notice effect]
Next, FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the identification mode of the second notice effect (cut-in notice), and is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device 41. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 32A is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device 41 when the second notice effect is performed in the first identification mode (for example, green) during the variable display game, and FIG. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the display device 41 when the second announcement effect is performed in the second identification mode (for example, red). In the following screen transition diagrams, descriptions of the same contents as in FIG. 31 will be omitted as appropriate.

When the effect control device 300 executes the second notice effect, a cut-in notice 725 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. - 特許庁For example, the cut-in notice 725 is a notice effect consisting of a character, a speech balloon displaying the character's line "First strike!", and a cut-in frame surrounding these. executed. In the latter half of the variation, the decoration first patterns A to C of the variation display area 610 are in the reach state "5↓5", and the second notice effect (cut-in notice) is executed along with the reach effect. Become.

As shown in FIG. 32A, the cut-in notice 725 balloon is green (first identification mode).
, the degree of expectation in the second announcement effect is 5%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32(B), when the cut-in notice 725 balloon is red (second identification mode), the degree of expectation in the second notice effect is 50%.

31 and 32, the mode of suggesting the degree of expectation is not limited to changing the color of the balloon, but may change the color of the character or lines, etc. Notifications may vary. Moreover, these shapes, patterns, etc. may be changed to suggest the degree of expectation. For example, the effect control device 300 may suggest the degree of expectation by changing the shape of the balloon into a cloud shape or a spark shape. Further, when a character or dialogue is changed as a mode of suggesting the degree of expectation, it may be configured such that a speech balloon of a color corresponding to the character or dialogue is displayed.

[Screen transition diagram of the display screen of the display device when the advance notice effect is executed]
33A and 33B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and are an example of screen transition when the advance notice effect is executed during the variable display game.

FIG. 33A(A) is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the variable display game is executed. The decoration first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are stopped and displayed with the symbol “357”, and the variable pending display shifted to pending is displayed in the pending digest area 640 .

FIG. 33A(B) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game is being executed. The first ornamental patterns A to C are in a state of being changed and displayed "↓↓↓".

FIG. 33A(C) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the first announcement effect is executed in the second identification mode while the variable display game is being executed. For example, when the first notice effect (dialogue notice) is executed in the first half variation, the display screen of the display device 41 is shown in FIG.
, a speech announcement 724 "It's a chance!" with a red balloon (second identification mode) is displayed, suggesting that the expectation level is 30%.

FIG. 33A(D) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game being executed is in the ready-to-win state in the latter half of the variable, and FIGS. It is a display screen when the ready-to-win effect is being performed. Variable display area 610
As shown in FIG. 33A(D), the decoration first patterns A to C are in a ready-to-win state with a pattern of "5↓5".

When the ready-to-win effect is started, as shown in FIG. 33A(E), a ready-to-win effect display 726 saying "Destroy the enemy tiger!!" is displayed in the center of the display screen. Subsequently, the ready-to-win effect display 726 displayed in the center of the display screen switches to a battle mode with the enemy tiger as shown in FIGS. 33A(F) to 33B(H).

Then, when the second notice effect (cut-in notice) in the second identification mode is executed during the ready-to-win effect, the display screen of the display device 41 displays a red balloon (the second identification mode) cut-in notice 725 "Preemptive!!" is displayed, suggesting that the expectation level is 50%.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 33B(H), a ready-to-win effect display 726 is displayed in which the self-tiger (player's side tiger) defeats the enemy tiger and wins the battle in the ready-to-win effect. Then, FIG. 33B (I
), the decorative first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 are stopped and displayed as the symbol "555", and the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes a big hit result mode (special result mode),
A fanfare effect and a jackpot game (special game) are sequentially started (not shown).

[Screen transition diagram of the display screen of the display device when the advance notice effect is executed]
33C and 33D are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and are another example of screen transition when the advance notice effect is executed during the variable display game.

Figures 33C(A) and 33C(B) are similar to Figures 33A(A) and 33A(B) described above.
It is a figure similar to . As shown in FIGS. 33C(A) and 33C(B), the decorative first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 stopped and displayed with the symbol “357” are the variable display “↓
↓↓”.

FIG. 33C(C') shows the first display according to the first identification mode when the variable display game is being executed.
It is a display screen of the display device 41 when the announcement effect is executed. For example, when the first notice effect (dialogue notice) is executed in the first half variation pattern, the display screen of the display device 41 is shown in FIG.
As shown in 3C(C'), a speech announcement 724 "It's a chance!" with a green balloon (first identification mode) is displayed, suggesting that the degree of expectation is 15%.

Figures 33C(D) to 33C(F) are similar to Figures 33A(D) to 33A(F) described above. The decoration first patterns A to C in the variable display area 610 are in a ready-to-win state with a pattern of "5↓5", and the ready-to-win effect display 726 switches to a battle mode between the self-tiger and the enemy tiger by the ready-to-win effect.

Then, when the second notice effect (cut-in notice) in the first identification mode is executed during the reach effect, the display screen of the display device 41 displays a green (
First identification mode) cut-in notice 725 “Preemptive!!” is displayed, suggesting that the expectation level is 5%. Therefore, the degree of expectation (15%) of the dialogue notice 724 (first notice effect) displayed first is higher than the degree of expectation (5%) of the later displayed cut-in notice 725 (second notice effect). is high, so that not only the latter half of the forewarning effect (the second foreplay effect) but also the first half of the foreplay effect (the first foreshadowing effect) can be approached with expectations. Therefore, since it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to both of the advance notice effects, the interest in the game can be improved.

Figures 33D(H) and 33D(I) are similar to Figures 33B(H) and 33B(I) described above.
It is a figure similar to . As shown in FIGS. 33D(H) and 33D(I), a ready-to-win effect display 726 for winning the battle is displayed, and the decoration first patterns A to C in the variable display area 610 are "55".
5" is stopped and displayed, the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes a big hit result mode (special result mode). Then, a fanfare effect and a jackpot game (special game) are sequentially started (not shown).

[Modified example of screen transition diagram of display screen of display device when notice effect is executed]
FIG. 34 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is a modification of the screen transition when the advance notice effect is executed during the variable display game. In the modified example of the screen transition diagram, a specific example of the identification mode of the second notice effect (cut-in notice) will be described. In addition, in this modified example, both the first notice effect and the second notice effect may be performed during the second half fluctuation after the ready-to-win state is established.

FIG. 34(G') shows the state when the second notice effect (cut-in notice) and the first notice effect (word notice) are executed during the ready-to-win effect after the reach state in FIG. 33A(F). Display device 4
1 is a display screen.

After the cut-in notice 725 with a green speech balloon is displayed by the second notice effect and the expectation level is 5%, the first notice effect is displayed on the cut-in notice 725 A remark 724 "It's a chance!" with a red balloon is superimposed, suggesting that the expectation level is 30%.

Then, after the battle production in which the enemy tiger attacks preemptively (not shown), FIG. 34 (H
'), a come-from-behind production in which the self-tiger defeats the enemy tiger with a counter and wins is executed as a ready-to-win production display 726 . Thus, when the degree of expectation of the first notice effect is higher than the degree of expectation of the second notice effect, the first notice effect is superimposed and displayed immediately after the second notice effect, thereby arousing the interest of the player. Since the range of effects of the ready-to-win effect display 726 can be widened as if hugging, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the case of the modified example of this screen transition, the first notice effect in the first half variation is skipped (from FIG. 33A(B), the screen transitions to FIG. 33A(D) by skipping FIG. 33A(C)). ). FIG. 34(I) after that is a view similar to FIG. 33A, in which the decorative first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 are stopped and displayed with the symbol "555", and the stop result mode of the variable display game is a big hit. It becomes a result mode (special result mode).

[Modified example of the table diagram illustrating the degree of expectation for a big hit with respect to the execution mode of each advance notice effect]
FIG. 35 is a modified example of a table diagram illustrating points related to the degree of expectation of a big win for the execution mode of each advance notice effect. The points here can be used as the effect points described above, but they do not have to be used as the effect points.

As shown in FIG. 35, the point (
value, predetermined value) is 15p (points) for the first identification mode (green), 30p for the second identification mode (red), and 1p for the third identification mode (black). be. Thus, in the modified example of this table diagram, in addition to the first identification mode and the second identification mode, for example, the third
As an identification mode, black (1p) with a low point is set as the color of the balloon. Note that the point value may be changed as appropriate, and identification modes after the fourth identification mode and advance notice effects after the third notice effect may be added as appropriate.

Here, points are assigned to each advance notice effect such as the first notice effect and the second notice effect. The integrated value obtained by accumulating the points of the notice effect that is executed multiple times is the expectation that the jackpot will be achieved (
Reliability), the notice effect to be executed a plurality of times, such as the first notice effect and the second notice effect, and the points of the notice effect are set. Note that the points of the advance notice effect may be set as points having a negative value such that the integrated value decreases.

In addition, the degree of expectation in the second notice effect (for example, cut-in notice) of the modified example is 5p in the case of the first identification mode (green), 50p in the case of the second identification mode (red), and the third It is 1p in the case of the identification mode (black). In this way, the degree of expectation is lowered when the third identification mode is selected in any of the announcement effects (1p).

Therefore, by the effect control device 300, for example, after the first notice effect (15p) of the first identification mode (green) is executed, when the second notice effect (50p) of the second identification mode (red) is executed , the accumulated value of points is 65p. Also, for example, the first
When the announcement effect (1p) and the second announcement effect (1p) are executed, the integrated value of the points becomes 2p.

The notice effect executed a plurality of times by the effect control device 300 and the points of the notice effect are set so that the greater the integrated value of the points, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit. For example, when the first announcement effect (30p) and the second announcement effect (50p) of the second identification mode (red) are executed, the accumulated value of the points becomes 80p, which is the maximum in the combination in the table of FIG. Become. Therefore, the player can recognize that the degree of expectation for the big win is high, and the expectation can be heightened, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, since the cumulative value of the points of the notice performance executed multiple times changes according to the degree of expectation of the big win, the player's interest in the first half of the notice performance (first notice performance) is also increased. It becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Timing chart when notice effect is applied to pseudo-continuous effect]
FIG. 36 is an example of a timing chart when the advance notice effect is applied to the pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous).

Here, the pseudo-continuous effect refers to simulating the decorative special symbols (decorative first symbols A to C) that are variably displayed during the period from the start to the end of one variable display game (special variable display game). This is an effect in which a pseudo variation (single effect, sub-effect, sub-variation) to temporarily stop display (pseudo stop display) is continuously performed for a predetermined number of times. During the pseudo-stop display, the pseudo-continuous symbols suggesting the pseudo-continuous effect may be stop-displayed. In addition, the pseudo-continuous effect is such that the pseudo-variation is continuously performed a predetermined number of times ( Multiple times) may be produced to make it look like it is being executed. At that time, even if the temporary stop display is not performed, the effect control device 300 displays a display such as "NEXT" on the display screen of the display device 41, so that the effect is such that the next pseudo change is performed. can be executed.

For example, in a variation display game started in FIGS. 36A and 36B, a pseudo-continuous effect consisting of a predetermined number of pseudo-variations (three times) is executed. The pseudo continuous effect and the predetermined number of pseudo fluctuations may be determined in step B2010 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 29), for example.

In the pseudo-continuous production of FIG. 36(A), the production control device 300 performs 1, 2 of the pseudo-continuous production.
Execute the first notice effect at the time of the second pseudo-variation (single effect), and at the time of the third pseudo-variation, the first to
3 Execute the advance notice effect. For example, the first notice effect is a dialogue notice, the second notice effect is a cut-in notice, and the third notice effect is an effect notice in which effect effects are added around balloons. The pseudo fluctuation execution time is set to the same time for the first and second pseudo fluctuations, and set to a longer time for the third pseudo fluctuation than the first and second pseudo fluctuations.

Here, in the first notice effect (speech notice) executed during the first and second pseudo fluctuations of the pseudo continuous effect, the balloon that becomes the background of the dialogue is white (for example, the expectation level is 1 %), and the second pseudo-variation is set to blue (eg, 10% expected). Also, in the case of the third pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous effect, the color is set to blue or higher (for example, the degree of expectation is 10% or higher).

At that time, the contents of the dialogue notice (line, character that emits dialogue, shape of balloon, pattern, etc.) other than the aspect that suggests the degree of expectation (color of balloon) should be the same for the first to third pseudo-changes. It is set and the first announcement effect is executed. Therefore, the player visually recognizes the notice effect of the same content as the pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous effect progresses, but the aspect suggesting the degree of expectation (the color of the balloon) changes and the degree of expectation for the big win increases. Since it can be recognized, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the third pseudo-variation of the pseudo-continuous effect, the first notice effect (prediction of speech with blue or more balloons) and the second and third notice effects (cut-in notice, effect notice) are executed. After that, for example, it becomes a ready-to-win state (for example, "5↓5") at the third pseudo-fluctuation, and can develop into a ready-to-win effect.

In addition, the production control device 300, in the pseudo continuous production, as shown in FIG.
The second pseudo-variation may be set to be longer than the first-time pseudo-variation, and the first notice performance and the second notice performance may be executed in the second pseudo-variation.

In the pseudo-continuous effect of FIG. 36(B), the effect control device 300 executes the first notice effect during the first pseudo-variation (single effect) of the pseudo-continuous effect, and executes the first notice effect during the second pseudo-variation. 1st and 2nd advance notice performances are executed, and the 1st to 3rd notice performances are executed at the time of the third pseudo change.

Here, in the first notice effect (dialogue notice) that is executed during the first to third pseudo fluctuations of the pseudo continuous effect, the balloon that becomes the background of the dialogue is white in the first pseudo fluctuation (for example, the expectation level is 1 %), and in the second pseudo-variation it is set to blue (e.g. expectedness 10%),
In the third pseudo-variation, the color is set to be blue or higher (for example, the degree of expectation is 10% or higher).

The contents of the first notice performance performed in the second and third pseudo fluctuations are set to be the same as those of the first notice performance performed in the first pseudo fluctuation except for the mode suggesting the degree of expectation. In addition, the second notice performance performed in the third pseudo variation is set so as to have the same contents as the second notice performance performed in the second pseudo variation except for the mode suggesting the degree of expectation.

In this way, the effect control device 300, in the pseudo-continuous effect of FIG. 36(B) as well as FIG. The effect of the same contents as the announcement effect in the pseudo fluctuation to be executed later is also executed in the announcement effect in the pseudo fluctuation to be executed later. Therefore, according to such an aspect, the player is provided with an effect including the already-executed advance notice effect each time the pseudo-variation of the pseudo-continuous effect progresses, and the effect suggesting the level of expectation (the color of the balloon). changes and the degree of expectation for a big win is increasing, so the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, even in step-up notices, which are effects in which single effects (secondary effects) set in multiple stages are sequentially executed from the lower stage (step) to the predetermined stage (step), the effects that include the already executed advance notice effects is performed each time, and the manner of suggesting the degree of expectation may be changed. Pseudo-continuous effects and step-up notices consist of multiple consecutive single effects,
The greater the number of times, the greater the expectation of a big hit.

[Actions and effects of the first embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing games (variation display game, special figure variation display game) and effect control means (game control device 100) capable of executing effects related to the game. Effect control device 300), and when the result of the game is a special result (big win), a special game state (big win game) advantageous to the player can be generated. The effect control means provides a first notice effect (for example, dialogue notice) that suggests an expectation (reliability) that the game stop result will be a special result, and a second notice effect that is executed after the first notice effect. and a notice effect (for example, a cut-in notice), and as the execution mode of the first notice effect and the execution mode of the second notice effect, the first identification mode (for example, the balloon is green), or A second identification mode (for example, a balloon is red) having a higher degree of expectation than the first identification mode can be selected. The expectation level is set higher than the level of expectation when the performance is executed in the second identification mode, and the level of expectation when the second announcement performance is executed in the first identification mode is set to the level of expectation when the first announcement performance is executed in the first identification mode. set lower than expected.

According to such a gaming machine 10, both the first half of the advance notice effect and the second half of the notice effect can easily raise the player's expectation, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) provides a pseudo-variation effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the stop result of the variable display game will be the special result in one variable display game. Pseudo continuous production (pseudo fluctuation, single production) performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) (
In at least two pseudo-variation performances among the pseudo-variation performances performed a predetermined number of times, the pseudo-variation performance is executed first after different modes suggesting the degree of expectation for the special result. A performance having the same content as the performance is also executed in a pseudo-fluctuation performance to be executed later.

According to this kind of gaming machine 10, the player can enjoy an effect including the already-executed advance notice effect each time the pseudo-variation of the pseudo-continuous effect progresses, as well as a mode suggesting the degree of expectation (for example, the color of the balloon). ) changes and the degree of expectation for a big win increases, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) produces a special result in at least two pseudo-variation effects that are continuously performed among the pseudo-variation effects that are performed a predetermined number of times. The performance having the same contents as the pseudo-fluctuation performance executed first after differentiating the mode suggesting the degree of expectation is also executed in the pseudo-fluctuation performance executed immediately after. According to such a gaming machine 10, in the pseudo fluctuations of the pseudo fluctuation effects that are continuously performed, the aspect indicating the degree of expectation (for example, the color of the balloon) changes, so that the player can recognize the aspect of the change. become easier,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs at least the first and second pseudo-variation effects (pseudo-variation, single effect) out of the pseudo-variation effects performed a predetermined number of times. The performance of the same content as the pseudo-fluctuation performance executed for the first time is also executed for the pseudo-fluctuation performance executed for the second time after differentiating the mode suggesting the degree of expectation for the special result. According to such a gaming machine 10, in the first and second pseudo-fluctuations of the pseudo-fluctuation effect, the aspect suggesting the degree of expectation (for example, the color of the balloon) changes. becomes easy to recognize, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) has a predetermined value (
points) can be executed multiple times, and the cumulative value obtained by accumulating the predetermined value of the announcement effects that are executed multiple times is the result of stopping the game. A notice effect to be executed multiple times is set so as to change according to the degree of expectation for the special result.

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the integrated value of the points of the notice effect executed a plurality of times changes according to the degree of expectation of the big win, the player's interest is shifted to the first half notice effect (first notice effect). Also, the game can be made to hold the player, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

[Second embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 43. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. In addition, in the following embodiment, the same reference numerals are used for the configuration having the same function as in the first embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

[Timing chart for executing suggestive effects]
FIG. 37 is an example of a timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggestive effect.

First, the timing of the first pattern effect in the suggestive effect according to the second embodiment will be described. When the effect control device 300 executes the first pattern effect while the variable display game is being executed, the suggestive effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 .

Here, the suggestive effect is a effect that suggests that a predetermined advance notice effect may be executed. The suggestive effect (genuine) in the first pattern effect functions as a true pattern effect after which a predetermined advance notice effect is actually performed. On the other hand, the suggestive effect (haunting effect) in the second pattern effect, which will be described later, functions as a false pattern effect in which the predetermined advance notice effect is not performed thereafter. Note that the effect control device 300 may perform the suggestive effect not only by the display screen of the display device 41 but also by the light emitting effect of the decoration devices 18a and 18b. The suggestive effect (genuine) may be called the first suggestive effect, and the suggestive effect (gase) may be called the second suggestive effect.

Subsequently, after the suggestive effect (genuine) in the first pattern effect is completed, the effect control device 300
executes a foretelling effect for notifying predetermined contents in advance as the foretelling effect (predetermined foretelling effect) according to the second embodiment. The notice effect is a effect that can predict the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and may suggest the degree of expectation (possibility) of a big hit, but is not limited to this, but it is a notice that a specific effect will be executed. It may be something to do.

Next, the timing of the second pattern effect in the suggestive effect according to the second embodiment will be described. When the effect control device 300 executes the second pattern effect, a suggestive effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 . As described above, the suggestive effect (haunting effect) in the second pattern effect becomes a false pattern effect in which the advance notice effect is not performed thereafter.

The suggestive effect (genuine) in the first pattern effect is the suggestive effect (authentic) in the second pattern effect (
The execution time is set to be shorter than that of Gase). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the lengthening of the rendering time (the total rendering time of the suggestive rendering and the preliminary announcement rendering) when the suggestive rendering (authentic) in the first pattern rendering and the subsequent advance notice rendering are executed, It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the suggestive effect (genuine) in the first pattern effect ends relatively early compared to the suggestive effect (fake) in the second pattern effect, and the player can easily pay attention to the advance notice effect to be executed after that. can improve the interest of In addition, suggestive production (authentic)
and the start timing of starting the suggestive effect (gase) may be the same.

In addition, the fluctuation time when the suggestive effect (genuine) and the advance notice effect of the first pattern effect are performed is
It is longer than the variation time when the suggestive effect (guise) of the second pattern effect is performed. Therefore, the time for performing the notice performance in the first pattern performance, which has a relatively high degree of expectation (reliability) of the big win compared to the second pattern performance, can be secured, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced by the notice performance. It is possible to increase the interest of the game.

[Timing chart when executing suggestive effect according to comparative example]
Now, with reference to FIG. 43, the timing of the suggestive effect according to the comparative example will be described. FIG. 43 is an example of a timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the comparative example executes the suggestive effect.

As shown in FIG. 43, the suggestive effect (authentic) in the first pattern effect of the comparative example functions as a true effect pattern in which the advance notice effect is performed after that, and the suggestive effect (fake) in the second pattern effect of the comparative example , It functions as a fake pattern effect that the advance notice effect is not performed after that.

Further, the suggestive effect (genuine) in the first pattern effect of the comparative example is set to the same execution time as the suggestive effect (guess) in the second pattern effect of the comparative example. Therefore, in the first pattern effect of the comparative example, the effect control device 300 executes the prognostic effect after executing the suggestive effect (genuine) of the same length as the suggestive effect (fake).

Therefore, in the first pattern effect of the comparative example, the effect time when the suggestive effect (genuineness) and the subsequent advance notice effect are executed is extended as compared with the first pattern effect of the second embodiment. , it becomes impossible to improve the amusement of the game like the suggestive effect according to the second embodiment. In addition, in the first pattern effect of the comparative example, the suggestive effect (genuine) is elongated as described above, so it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the advance notice effect to be executed thereafter.

[Timing chart for executing suggestive effects]
38A and 38B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 according to the second embodiment in chronological order, and are examples of screen transitions when the suggestive effect is executed during the variable display game. .

FIG. 38A(A) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game is being executed. The first decoration patterns A to C in the variable display area 610 and the small second decoration patterns (small patterns and special decoration patterns) in the variable display area 615 are in a state of being displayed in a variable display "↓↓↓".

In the first pending display portion 630a, one pending display 633a (starting memory display, stock pending) corresponding to the first start memory (special figure 1 start winning memory) is displayed, and in the pending digestion area 640, fluctuations during execution A starting memory display (a pending display during a change, a pending display during digestion) corresponding to the starting memory related to the display game is displayed.

The special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 displays the number "1" indicating the number of special figures 1 reserved, and the number "0" indicating the number of special figures 2 reserved is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660 there is

In addition, a stage display 730 that displays the current stage (mode, effect background situation) is displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen of the display device 41 . The stage display 730 displays characters “Normal Stage” indicating that the current stage is a normal stage.

FIG. 38A(B) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the suggestion effect is executed during the variable display game.

When the suggestive effect is executed, a large suggestive effect display 731 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen of the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 38A(B). The suggestion effect display 731 is a effect display that provides a predetermined suggestion, for example, a effect display that suggests the possibility of transitioning from the current stage to a different stage (for example, "Tiger Zone", which will be described later). The suggestion effect display 731 is shown in FIG. 3, for example.
As shown in 8A(B), the player can visually recognize the changing decoration first symbols A to C which are semi-transparently displayed on the display screen together with the suggestion effect display 731 . Note that the suggestive effect display 731 is not limited to the form of large translucent display in the center of the display screen, but may be a small display form, a form in which a predetermined character appears, or the like. The effect of the mode of FIG. 38A(B) is executed in common for the suggestive effect (genuine) and the suggestive effect (gase).
In the state of , the player is suggested that a transition to a different stage (that is, a predetermined advance notice effect) may be executed, but it is unknown whether this stage transition is actually executed.

FIGS. 38A(C) and 38B(D) are display screens of the display device 41 when the suggestive effect functions as the true pattern effect in the first pattern effect. When the suggestive effect is the authentic pattern effect, the stage display 7 is displayed in front of the suggestive effect display 731 (upper layer).
30 is enlarged and displayed. In the stage display 730, for example, a message such as "Into Tiger Zone!!"
Characters are displayed indicating that the current stage has transitioned to "Tiger Zone".

Then, as shown in FIG. 38B(D), the stage display 730 displays the characters "tiger zone" indicating that the current stage is "tiger zone". In addition, the effect control device 300 can change the background of the display screen, etc., in response to the transition of the current stage, so that the player who visually recognizes the change of the background, etc. can enjoy the effect of the new stage. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, the transition of the stage to the "Tiger Zone" (including the display of characters such as "Tiger Zone!" and "Tiger Zone") suggests the expectation of a big hit (for example, high expectations). A predetermined advance notice effect (so-called zone effect) is provided. In the "tiger zone" stage, a particular background image may be displayed as the background image of the display screen. Note that the predetermined notice effect is not limited to the zone effect, and may be other effects such as a dialog notice effect and a character notice effect. After that, the variable display game is stopped, so that the first decorative symbols A to C and the second decorative symbols are stopped.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38A(E), when the suggestive effect is the fake pattern effect
The effect control device 300 maintains the display state of the suggestive effect display 731 which is large and translucent displayed in the center of the display screen of the display device 41 .

FIGS. 38A(E) and 38B(F) are display screens of the display device 41 when the suggestive effect functions as a guess pattern effect in the second pattern effect. In addition, FIG. 38A (E)
Although the stage display 730 in the upper left part of the display screen is hidden, it may be displayed. Then, when the effect control device 300 ends the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect display 731 displayed on the display screen disappears as shown in FIG. 38B(F). It should be noted that the stage does not transition to the "tiger zone" as a predetermined notice effect, and after that, the variable display game is stopped, and the first decorative symbols A to C and the second decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. .

[First Modified Example and Second Modified Example of Timing Chart When Suggestion Effect is Executed]
FIG. 39 is a first modified example and a second modified example of the timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggestive effect.

First, with reference to FIG. 39(A), the timing of the suggestion effect according to the first modification of the second embodiment will be described.

In the first pattern effect according to the first modification of the second embodiment, the effect control device 300 executes the first half suggestive effect (authentic) as the authentic pattern effect in which the advance notice effect is actually performed after that. After the first half suggestive effect (genuine) ends, the effect control device 300 executes the advance notice effect.

On the other hand, in the second pattern effect according to the first modified example, the effect control device 300 performs the first half suggestive effect and the second half suggestive effect (
gase).

Here, the effect control device 300 executes a common first half suggestive effect that has the same content when viewed by the player in the first pattern effect and the second pattern effect according to the first modified example.
The common first half suggestive effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 38A(B), for example. According to this aspect, the effect control device 300 can use common data when performing the first half suggestive effect in the first pattern effect and the second pattern effect, so the effect time of the first pattern effect is extended. It is possible to reduce the processing load as well as to reduce the

Next, with reference to FIG. 39(B), the timing of the suggestive effect according to the second modification of the second embodiment will be described.

In the first pattern effect according to the second modification of the second embodiment, the effect control device 300, the first
Similar to the first pattern effect according to the modified example, the first half suggestive effect (authentic) is executed, and the advance notice effect is executed after the first half suggestive effect (authentic) ends.

On the other hand, in the second pattern effect according to the second modification, the effect control device 300 performs the first half suggestive effect and the second half suggestive effect (
gase).

Here, the effect control device 300 executes a common suggestive effect that has the same contents when the player visually recognizes the first half suggestive effect and the second half suggestive effect of the second pattern effect. According to this aspect, the effect control device 300 can use common data for the first half suggestive effect and the second half suggestive effect when executing the second pattern effect, so that the data read immediately before can be looped as it is. can be used, and the processing burden can be further reduced. In addition, in the authentic pattern presentation of the first pattern presentation, the advance notice presentation is performed after the first half suggestive presentation (authentic), so the extension of the presentation time of the first pattern presentation is reduced in the same manner as in the first modification. can.

In addition, by combining the first modification of FIG. 39(A) and FIG. A common suggestive effect may be executed in the suggestive effect and the second half suggestive effect. According to this aspect, the effect control device 300 uses common data for the first half suggestive effect of the first pattern effect, the first half suggestive effect of the second pattern effect, and the second half suggestive effect of the second pattern effect. Therefore, the processing load can be greatly reduced.

[Third Modification of Timing Chart When Suggestion Effect is Executed]
FIG. 40 is a third modification of the timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggestive effect.

In the third modified example, the effect control device 300 executes the first pattern effect and the second pattern effect as in the first modified example and the second modified example. It is possible to execute the third pattern effect divided into.

In the third pattern effect, the effect control device 300 executes the first half suggestive effect, and then sequentially executes the latter half suggestive effect, for example, one last suggestion (guess) and one last second suggestion (reverse).

The first suggestion (gase) after the second half suggestion performance is a suggestion performance that makes the player think that it is a fake pattern performance in which the subsequent advance notice performance is not performed, and the latter half suggestion performance (gase) of the second pattern performance.
It may be a suggestive production that is common to a part of .

In addition, the 2 suggestion (reversal) after the second half suggestion performance is a reverse performance performed after the 1 suggestion (gase), suggesting that the advance notice performance will be performed after making the player think once of the guess pattern performance. It is a kind of authentic pattern production.

In a 3rd pattern production|presentation, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 performs the reverse production|presentation of 2 suggestions (reverse) after 1 suggestion (gase). Therefore, the player who thought that the advance notice performance would not be performed by the false pattern performance of the last suggestion (gase) can be given a positive surprise that the notice performance will be performed. can be improved.

Although the effect control device 300 divides the second half suggestion effect of the third pattern effect into two (last one suggestion, last two suggestions), the second half suggestion effect may be performed by dividing into three or more. .

[Fourth Modification of Timing Chart When Suggestion Effect is Executed]
FIG. 41 is a fourth modification of the timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggestive effect.

In the fourth modified example, the effect control device 300 can execute first to third pattern effects with different execution times for suggestive effects.

In the first pattern effect, the effect control device 300 can execute, for example, the first suggestion effect (first suggestion) as the authentic pattern effect, and then sequentially execute the notice effect and the ready-to-win effect, etc. After that, the variable display game stop result. can be a big hit (special result). At that time, the effect control device 300 executes the first suggestive effect so as to be shorter than the execution time of the second suggestive effect.

In addition, in the second pattern effect, the effect control device 300 can, for example, execute the second suggestion effect (second suggestion) as a false pattern effect, and then set the stop result of the variable display game as failure. At that time, the effect control device 300 executes the second suggestive effect so as to be shorter than the execution time of the third suggestive effect.

Furthermore, in the third pattern effect, the effect control device 300 can execute, for example, the third suggestion effect (third suggestion) as the genuine pattern effect, and then sequentially execute the notice effect and the ready-to-win effect, etc., and perform the subsequent variable display game. The stop result can be a big hit (special result). The third suggestive effect has a longer execution time than the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 of the fourth modification performs the variable display game so that the variable times of the first pattern effect and the third pattern effect in which the notice effect is executed are the same. Further, the variable time of the second pattern effect in which the advance notice effect is not executed is shorter than the variable time of the first and third pattern effects. Therefore, since the fluctuation time of the first pattern production and the third pattern production is the same time, even if the execution time of the third suggestive production in the third pattern production becomes longer, the entire fluctuation time of the third pattern production. Lengthening can be reduced, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the variation display game can be ended earlier when the second pattern effect in which the false pattern effect is performed is selected, compared to when the first pattern effect or the second pattern effect in which the genuine pattern effect is performed is selected. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the delay of the performance that does not increase the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Therefore, the execution time of the third suggestion effect (third suggestion), which is the authentic pattern effect of the third pattern effect, is longer than the execution time of the second suggestion effect (second suggestion), which is the false pattern effect of the second pattern effect. become longer. On the other hand, since the notice effect of the third pattern effect is shorter than the notice effect of the first pattern effect, the fluctuation time of the first pattern effect and the third pattern effect are the same.

Therefore, the performance control device 300 makes the execution time of the third suggestion performance, which is the authentic pattern performance, longer than the execution time of the second suggestion performance, which is the false pattern performance, to perform the suggestion performance, so that the performance is compared with the normal variation mode. The expectation of the player that the advance notice performance with high expectation of the big win is executed after that can be further heightened, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, since the performance control device 300 can execute the third pattern performance at the same time as the first pattern performance without delaying the entire fluctuation time, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Note that the first to third suggestion effects are set to have the same start timing, and are executed after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation as shown in FIG. 41, but may be executed at the start of the fluctuation. . For reach effects, for example, not only reach effects such as SP 1 to 3 reach and premium reach, but also pre-reading notice, pseudo-continuous effect, continuous notice (chance notice), step-up notice, and after counting a predetermined number of seconds Notice timer notice (countdown notice,
x seconds advance notice) and the like may be included.

In addition, the effect control device 300 makes the first half of the suggestive effects in the first to third suggestive effects common as described above so as to reduce the processing load when executing the first to third suggestive effects. , each suggestive effect can also be executed.

[Fifth Modified Example of Timing Chart When Suggestion Effect is Executed]
FIG. 42 is a fifth modification of the timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggestive effect.

The suggestive effect executed by the effect control device 300 can also be applied to a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous) as shown in FIG. The production control device 300 is a single variable display game (
From the start to the end of the special figure variation display game), a pseudo variation (single performance , sub-effect, sub-variation) can be performed continuously for a predetermined number of times in a pseudo-continuous effect.

In the pseudo-continuous effect of FIG. 42, the effect control device 300 executes the suggestive effect (genuine) as the true pattern effect during the first pseudo-fluctuation (single effect) of the pseudo-continuous effect. The effect control device 300 can suggest, for example, that the second and subsequent pseudo fluctuations are successful and continue by means of a suggestive effect (genuine).

Then, in the advance notice effect executed after the suggestive effect (genuine), the effect control device 300 displays, for example, a character (for example, “continued”) indicating that the pseudo-variation is successful and continues in the special pattern C and makes a notice. You can perform a production to do. In addition, in the announcement effect, the effect control device 300
Characters indicating that the pseudo-fluctuation is successful and continued may be displayed in the special patterns A and B, or characters or figures other than "continuation" may be displayed to execute the notice effect.

Subsequently, the performance control device 300 executes a suggestive performance (gase) as a false pattern performance during the second pseudo variation (single performance) of the pseudo continuous performance. Production control device 300, for example, 3
It is possible to suggest that the pseudo-fluctuation after the first time succeeds and does not continue (results in failure) by a suggestive effect (gase). Note that the suggestive effect (guess) may be divided into a first half suggestive effect and a second half suggestive effect so as to reduce the processing load, and a common suggestive effect may be repeated.

Then, the effect control device 300, during the suggestive effect (gase) (for example, at the end of the suggestive effect),
After the pseudo-variation suggests that it will not continue and end (fail), the variation display game can be stopped in an out-of-order manner.

In addition, the pseudo fluctuations of multiple times (for example, the first and second times) executed by the production control device 300 are shown in FIG.
As shown in 2, the time is the same for both the true pattern presentation that results in success and the false pattern presentation that results in failure. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the extension of the presentation time either when the pseudo-fluctuation succeeds or when it fails, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Actions and effects of the second embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing games (variation display game, special figure variation display game) and effect control means (game control device 100) capable of executing effects related to the game. Effect control device 300), and when the result of the game is a special result (big win), a special game state (big win game) advantageous to the player can be generated. The effect control means provides, as suggestive effects, a first suggestive effect (genuine pattern effect, suggestive effect (genuine)) in which a predetermined advance notice effect is executed after execution, and a second suggestive effect ( At least one of guess pattern effects and suggestive effects (guess) can be selected and executed, and when the first suggestive effect is selected, the execution time of the suggestive effect is selected by the second suggestive effect. be shorter than the execution time when

According to such a gaming machine 10, the effect control means provides a second suggestive effect (a false pattern effect,
A first suggestive effect (genuine pattern effect, suggestive effect (genuine)) is executed so that the execution time is shorter than that of the suggestive effect (guess). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the extension of the performance time when the first suggestion performance and the subsequent notice performance are executed, and to improve the interest of the game. Also, the first suggestive effect ends relatively early compared to the second suggestive effect, and the player can easily pay attention to the notice effect to be executed after that, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) controls the game time (
The game time (fluctuation time) of the game when the first suggestive performance (genuine pattern performance, suggestive performance (genuine)) is selected is made longer than the variable time). According to such a gaming machine 10, compared to the second pattern effect including the second suggestive effect, the degree of expectation for a relatively big hit including the first suggestive effect (
Since the time for performing the notice performance in the first pattern performance with high reliability can be secured, the player's expectation for the big win can be heightened by the notice performance, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are effects having the same start timing and a common mode (first half suggestive effect). Production control device 3
00 can use common data when performing the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect,
It is possible to reduce the extension of the rendering time of the first suggestive rendering and to reduce the processing load.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) provides, as the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (genuine pattern effect,
At least one of a first suggestion), a third suggestion effect (genuine pattern effect, third suggestion), and a second suggestion effect (gase pattern effect, second suggestion) in which a predetermined advance notice effect is not executed after execution. , is executable by choice. In addition, the performance control means makes the execution time of the suggestive performance when the first suggestive performance is selected shorter than the execution time when the second suggestive performance is selected, and the second suggestive performance is selected. The execution time of the suggestive performance in the case is made shorter than the execution time when the third suggestive performance is selected.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the execution time of the third suggestive effect, which is the genuine pattern effect, is
Since the suggestive effect is set longer than the execution time of the second suggestive effect, which is a fake pattern effect,
It is possible to heighten the expectation of the player that the advance notice performance with high expectation of the big win is executed after that, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the performance control means can execute the third suggestive performance at the same time as the first suggestive performance without delaying the entire fluctuation time,
It can improve the interest of the game

The effect control means (the effect control device 300) sets the first suggestion effect (authentic pattern effect, The game time (fluctuation time) of the game is lengthened when the first suggestion) or the third suggestion effect (genuine pattern effect, third suggestion) is selected. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, compared to the case where the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect, which are genuine pattern effects, are selected, the second suggestive effect, which is the false pattern effect, is selected. You can finish the game early,
It is possible to reduce the delay of a performance that does not increase the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) controls the game time (fluctuation time) of the game when the first suggested effect (authentic pattern effect, first suggestion) is selected, and the third suggested effect (authentic pattern effect, first suggestion). 3 suggestion) is selected to have the same length as the game time (fluctuation time). According to the gaming machine 10, the game time of the game when the first suggestive effect is selected and the game time when the third suggestive effect is selected are the same, so the execution time of the third suggestive effect is long. Even when this occurs, it is possible to reduce the lengthening of the entire variable time, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The first suggestive effect, the second suggestive effect, and the third suggestive effect have the same start timing and a common aspect. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the suggestive presentation while achieving the above effects.

[Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 59. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first and second embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

[Basic configuration of game machine]
FIG. 44 is a front view of the game board 30 of the game machine 10 of the third embodiment. 45 is a perspective view of the game board 30. FIG. FIG. 46 is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 45. FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is characterized in that a rotator unit 800 (winning stabilizing means, guiding means), which will be described later, is arranged in the gaming machines 10 of the first and second embodiments.

In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment and the like, a game area 32 is provided in an area surrounded by guide rails 31, and a center case 40 is attached substantially in the center of the game area 32. A display device 41 is attached behind the central window of the center case 40 .

An upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) is provided on the upper part of the center case 40, a lamp display device 80 is provided on the left side, and a side effect unit 40d is provided on the right side.

A starting winning port 36 (winning area) is arranged in the lower center of the game area 32, and a normal variable winning device 37 (movable member 37b) (winning area) is provided on the right side and slightly higher position, and further upper right thereof. A normal figure start gate 34 (a winning area) is arranged in . In addition, the game area 3
2, a special variable winning device 39 (opening/closing door 39c) is arranged at a position above the normal figure starting gate 34.

In the first embodiment, a tube-shaped warp passage 40e (first intake channel) having an inflow port 40a communicating with a position on the left side of the game area 32 and substantially in the center in the height direction
and a stage portion 40b that receives the game ball rolling from the warp passage 40e and causes the game ball to flow down toward the game area 32 including the start winning opening 36.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the rotor unit 800 (
guide means) are provided. In addition, the lower end of the warp passage 40e (induction means) is connected to the rotor unit 800, and the game ball rolling on the warp passage 40e is supplied to the upper surface of the rotor unit 800 (rotation stage 810). The rotating body unit 800 may be configured to engage with the stage portion 40b by means of a groove or the like, or may be formed integrally with the stage portion 40b. Further, the display device 41 is arranged behind the rotator unit 800 .

In addition, in the vicinity of the inlet 40a on the left side of the game area 32, an obstacle nail (not shown) is arranged so that 80 to 90% of the game balls (left-handed game balls) that flow down to the left in the game area 32 flow down to the inlet 40a. ) are planted.

[Basic configuration of rotating unit]
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the rotating body unit 800 includes a rotating stage 810 on which game balls roll, and a tray section 801 surrounding the rotating stage 810. The rotating stage 810 and the tray section 801 are It is inclined downward toward the game area 32 (for example, the inclination angle is about 5 degrees). Thereby, the rotating body unit 800 can cause the game ball to flow down toward the game area 32 including the start winning opening 36 .

The tray portion 801 has a rectangular flat rolling surface 802 (bottom surface) and a rolling surface 80 on which game balls roll.
It has walls 803A, 803B, 803C located at two outer edges. The wall portion 803A is a member that rises from the edge of the rolling surface 802 on the display device 41 side and extends in the width direction (horizontal direction of the game machine 10). The wall portion 803C is a member that extends in the depth direction (the front-rear direction of the game machine 10), and the wall portion 803C is a member that rises from the right edge of the rolling surface 802 and extends in the depth direction.

One end of the tray portion 801 is arranged on the stage portion 40b with the downstream portion of the stage portion 40b exposed. The rolling surface 802 has an open edge facing the game area 32 side,
In addition, since it is inclined downward toward the game area 32 side as described above, the game ball supplied to the rolling surface 802 moves from the edge of the rolling surface 802 on the game area 32 side to the downstream portion of the stage portion 40b. It flows down toward the game area 32 via (stage part 40b1, stage part 40b2).

A portion of the wall portion 803B facing the warp passage 40e is opened, and the lower end of the warp passage 40e is connected to the opened portion. Further, the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 is provided with a protrusion extending from a position adjacent to the lower end of the warp passage 40e toward the rotation stage 810, and a guide rib that guides the game ball flowing down from the warp passage 40e to the rotation stage 810. 804
is formed. The guide rib 804 is located closer to the wall portion 803 than the rotating shaft of the rotating stage 810 .
It is formed so as to guide the game ball in a direction between the width direction of the tray portion 801 and the center direction (back and forth direction) of the rotary stage 810 from the position on the A side. In addition, the warp passage 40e is moved so that the game ball flowing down from the warp passage 40e goes directly to the rotation stage 810 as described above.
is arranged, the guide rib 804 may be omitted.

The wall portion 803B and the wall portion 803C extend from the edge of the tray portion 801 on the game area 32 side. An extending portion 806, which will be described later, extends from the central portion of the edge. Therefore, the stage portion 40b is divided by the left wall portion 803B and the extension portion 806.
It is divided into a stage portion 40b2 partitioned by a wall portion 803C and an extension portion 806 on the right side.

The rotary stage 810 is a rotating body having a cylindrical shape and rotating around a cylindrical axis, and its upper surface serves as a rolling surface 811 on which game balls roll. Note that the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 is also inclined downward toward the game area 32 as described above.

In addition, the rotary stage 810 is rotated by a rotary stage motor 143 (FIG. 50), and the rotary stage motor 143 (FIG. 50) is driven/stopped by the game control device 100 (FIG. 50), and the rotation speed (rotation direction ) is controlled. Note that the rotary stage 8
10 normally rotates counterclockwise, but may rotate clockwise (reverse rotation) as described later.

Notch portions 812 (holding portions) are formed on the periphery of the rotating stage 810 at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. Five cutouts 812 are formed in this embodiment (the number is arbitrary), and are formed so that the upper surface and the side surface of the rotary stage 810 are opened. Notch 812
is formed so that a game ball can be arranged inside in plan view (top view), and the rotary stage 8
A game ball rolling on ten rolling surfaces 811 can enter the notch 812 .

Here, the tray part 801 is a storage part 8 having an inner wall that follows the side surface of the rotation stage 810 .
05 , and a rotation stage 810 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 805 . Therefore, since the notch 812 faces the inner wall of the housing portion 805 , the portion of the notch 812 that opens to the side of the rotation stage 810 is closed by the inner wall of the housing portion 805 . Therefore, the game ball that has entered the notch portion 812 is held by the notch portion 812 and the inner wall of the housing portion 805 .

The depth of the notch 812 is preferably deeper than the radius of the game ball and shallower than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball held in the notch 812 is exposed from the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 . Therefore, the rolling surface 8 of the rotary stage 810
11 collides with the game ball held in the notch 812, the rolling direction of the game ball can be changed. In addition, since the depth of the notch portion 812 is deeper than the radius of the game ball, the game ball held in the notch portion 812 collides with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 811 so that the notch portion 812 It can reduce being ejected.

By the way, the rolling surface 811 of the rotating stage 810 is higher than the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 (so that the rotating stage 810 intersects the same plane formed by the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801). may be placed. At this time, the rotating stage 810 and the tray section 80
A step is formed between 1, and the step is preferably formed so as to be smaller than the radius of the game ball.

In this case, the game ball supplied from the warp passage 40e climbs over the step and reaches the rotation stage 8.
Although it moves to the rolling surface 811 of 10, the rolling direction of a game ball can be irregularly changed when overcoming. In addition, there is a possibility that some game balls stay in front of the step without getting over the step, but when the notch 812 comes to a position facing the game ball, the notch 812 The notch portion 81 of the game ball that stays on the condition that the ball is not held
You can also enter 2.

An extending portion 806 extends from a central portion of the edge of the tray portion 801 on the side of the game area 32 and directly above the start winning opening 36 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 10 . In addition, the extending portion 806 and the tray portion 801 are linearly penetrated from the tip of the extending portion 806 on the side of the start winning opening 36 to the inner wall of the housing portion 805, and rotates with the open portion of the tip of the extending portion 806. A guide groove 807 communicating with the side surface of the stage 810 is formed. The guide grooves 807 sequentially face the notches 812 as the rotary stage 810 rotates.

Here, the extending portion 806 forms the same plane as the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801,
It may be formed so as to be higher than the rolling surface 802 (so that the extension 806 intersects the same plane formed by the rolling surface 802). Also, the portion adjacent to the guide groove 807 of the tray portion 801 may be formed so as to be higher than the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 in the same manner as the extension portion 806 .

The bottom surface of the guide groove 807 is inclined downward toward the start winning opening 36 . Also, the width of the guide groove 807 is wider than the diameter of the game ball. The bottom surface of the guide groove 807 is
It is arranged so as not to form a convex step when viewed from the bottom surface of the notch portion 812 . On the other hand, the bottom surface of the notch portion 812 is inclined downward toward the game area 32 like the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 . Therefore, when the cutout portion 812 faces the guide groove 807, the game ball held in the cutout portion 812 is introduced into the guide groove 807, and enters the start winning opening 36 from the tip of the guide groove 807 (extending portion 806). You can run down towards it.

In addition, a gate valve 820 (first valve) is arranged at a position of the guide groove 807 serving as an inlet for game balls. The gate valve 820 can be driven in the height direction (normal direction of the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801) by a valve solenoid 144 (FIG. 50).
Switching control is performed between a state in which the entrance of is closed and a state in which the entrance is opened. The gate valve 820 is urged by a biasing means (such as a spring) in a direction to close the guide groove 807, but when the valve solenoid 144 is driven, the gate valve 820 is urged in a direction (downward) to draw the gate valve 820 out of the guide groove 807. When the drive of the valve solenoid 144 stops, the gate valve 820 is urged in the direction (upward) into the guide groove 807 by the urging force of the urging means to close the guide groove 807 . . The valve solenoid 144 is controlled by the game control device 100, and is controlled to open the entrance at the timing when the notch 812 faces the guide groove 807 (and in most cases where the timing occurs).

The distance between the main surface of the gate valve 820 on the side of the game area 32 and the edge of the tray portion 801 on the side of the game area 32 is preferably shorter than the radius of the game ball. As a result, when the gate valve 820 is closed, the game ball that rolls from the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 in the direction of entering the guide groove 807 contacts the gate valve 820 and rebounds, and the stage portion 40b1 or the stage portion 40b
2, entry of the game ball into the guide groove 807 can be restricted.

Further, when the gate valve 820 is closed, the height of the gate valve 820 is set to the rotation stage 810.
(the gate valve 820 intersects the same plane formed by the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810). As a result, when the notch 812 is arranged not to face the guide groove 807, the gate valve 820 blocks the game ball rolling in the direction directly toward the guide groove 807 from the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810. Since the rolling direction is changed by using the
07 can be restricted.

When game balls are constantly supplied to the rotating stage 810 and are held in all of the notch portions 812 of the rotating stage 810, and the rotating stage 810 rotates at a constant rotational speed, the extension portion 806 (the guide groove 807 ) enter the start winning port 36, the frequency of winning is almost constant. Therefore, when the game balls that enter the start winning port 36 are only those that flow down from the extension part 806 (guiding groove 807), the start value S of the gaming machine 10 depends on the rotation speed of the rotation stage 810, but is constant. becomes. In addition, in this embodiment,
The start value S is the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed per predetermined period (for example, one minute) in the normal game state (when hitting left), that is, the number of times the game ball wins the start winning hole 36 per predetermined period. be.

By the way, in the rotator unit 800, the game balls flowing down from the extension portion 806 (guiding grooves 807), the game balls flowing down from the stage portion 40b1, and the game balls flowing down from the stage portion 40b2 include the start winning opening 36. It flows down toward the game area 32 where it does.

Here, the extension portion 806 (guiding groove 807) (and the stage portion 40b1 and the stage portion 40b)
2) and the starting winning opening 36 are spaced in the height direction longer than the diameter of the game ball. again,
A center portion of the stage portion 40b1 and the stage portion 40b2 has a concave shape inclined toward the game area 32 side.

Therefore, for example, when a game ball rolls down from the stage portion 40b1 and the stage portion 40b2 in a manner that it rolls from the outside in the left-right direction of the concave shape toward the center (extending portion 806 side), the game ball enters the start winning opening 36. more likely to flow towards Therefore, most of the game balls flowing down from the extension part 806 (guiding groove 807) enter the start winning opening 36, but the game balls collide with the game balls flowing down from the stage part 40b1 or the stage part 40b2 and start winning. Winning to the mouth 36 may be hindered.

In addition, the game ball flowing down from the stage portion 40b1 or the stage portion 40b2
(Induction groove 807) There is also a case where the starting winning opening 36 is won without colliding with the game ball that has flowed down.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 45, for example, a line of road pegs (not shown) is planted in a direction toward the start winning opening 36 with a position below the windmill in the game area 32 as a base point. There is a case where the game ball flowing down along the line wins the start winning opening 36. - 特許庁Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down from the rotating body unit 800 collides with the game ball that has flowed down in the game area 32 (road spikes, etc.) without passing through the rotating body unit 800, and winning to the start winning opening 36 is hindered. In some cases.

It should be noted that there is a case where the game ball with the trailing spike jumps and lands on the rotating stage 810 or the tray section 801 .

As described above, the game ball flowing down from the extending portion 806 (guiding groove 807) and the stage portion 40
The game ball that has flowed down from b1, the game ball that has flowed down from the stage portion 40b2, and the game ball that has flowed down in the game area 32 without passing through the rotating body unit 800 interfere (collide) with each other near the start winning opening 36. As a result, the frequency of winning of game balls into the start winning opening 36, ie, the start value S, will vary to some extent. Of course, the extension 806 (guide groove 807)
A configuration is also possible in which all of the game balls flowing down from the opening enter the start winning opening 36.例文帳に追加In this case, for example, obstacle nails are appropriately arranged on both sides in the width direction of the path from the extending portion 806 (guiding groove 807) to the start winning opening 36, and the game flowed down from other than the extending portion 806 (guiding groove 807) The ball should be prevented from colliding with the game ball flowing down from the extending portion 806 (guiding groove 807).

In this embodiment, as described above, the start value S can be stabilized, but the rolling of the game ball in the rotating body unit 800 and the destination of the game ball flowing down from the rotating body unit 800 are difficult to predict. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the rolling and flowing state of the game ball, and the interest can be improved.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the rotator unit 800 is described on the premise that the game ball is made to flow down toward the starting winning opening 36, but other winning areas, for example, the normal figure starting gate 34
, the general winning port 35, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39.

[Behavior of game ball in rotating body unit]
FIG. 47 is a plan view of the rotator unit 800 (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 44), showing the state of game balls in the rotator unit 800 (No. 1). FIG. 48 is a plan view of the rotator unit 800 (sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 44), showing the state of game balls in the rotator unit 800 (No. 2). FIG. 49 is a plan view of the rotator unit 800 (cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 44), showing the state of game balls in the rotator unit 800 (No. 3).

The behavior of the game ball supplied to the rotator unit 800 will be examined. As shown in FIG. 47, a game ball is held in at least one of the five cutouts 812, and the guide groove 807 does not face the cutout 812, and the inlet of the guide groove 807 is closed by a gate valve. 820 is closed, the game ball moves from the warp passage 40e (guide rib 804) to the rotating stage 8.
Consider the case of flowing down to 10.

In this case, as described above, when the game ball rides on the rotating stage 810, the direction of rolling changes irregularly, so that the game ball directly hits the empty notch 812 as shown in [1] in FIG. 47, or when the game ball passes between the empty cutouts 812 and flows down from the rotary stage 810 and collides with the wall portion 803C of the tray portion 801, as shown in [2] in FIG. A behavior of flowing down to the stage portion 40b2 and then to the game area 32 can be considered.

Also, as shown in [3] in FIG. 47, when the game ball rolls on the rotating stage 810 in the same manner as in [1], but the game ball is already held in the notch 812 beyond it. ,
The rolling game ball collides with the held game ball, the rolling direction changes, and another notch portion 81 is formed.
Behavior such as entering into 2 is also conceivable. In any case, the game ball that has flowed down to the rotating stage 810 eventually flows down toward the game area 32, but along the way, the notch portion 81
2 can roll in all directions on the rotating stage 810 and the tray portion 801 by colliding with the game balls or the walls 803A, 803B, 803C.

Moreover, as shown in [4] in FIG. 47, there is also a game ball that rolls toward the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807) on the tray portion 801 (rolling surface 802). In this case, the game ball is
When it exceeds the edge of the tray portion 801 on the side of the game area 32, it begins to fall so as to intersect the same plane formed by the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801, and then collides with the side surface of the extension portion 806 to cause the game ball to fall. Most of them fall onto the stage portion 40b1. Note that the stage portion 40b1
The game ball that has fallen to (stage portion 40b2) falls toward the game area 32 (or the start winning opening 36).

Also, there may be a game ball that rolls in a direction reaching the guide groove 807 before crossing the edge of the tray portion 801 on the side of the game area 32 . However, by designing the gap between the main surface of the gate valve 820 on the side of the game area 32 and the edge of the tray portion 801 on the side of the game area 32 to be smaller than the radius of the game ball, the game ball is placed on the gate valve 820 Most of the game balls collide and flow down to the stage portion 40b1 and the stage portion 40b2.

Furthermore, there is also a game ball that rolls from the rotary stage 810 toward the guide groove 807.
When the height of the gate valve 820 is higher than the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 , most of the game balls collide with the gate valve 820 and are prevented from entering the guide groove 807 .

As described above, when the gate valve 820 closes the inlet of the guide groove 807, the guide groove 80
A game ball hardly gets into 7.

As shown in FIG. 48, the game ball is held in at least one of the five cutouts 812, and the gate valve 820 is opened at the timing when the guide groove 807 faces the cutout 812 holding the game ball. Consider a case where a game ball flows down to the rotation stage 810 from the warp passage 40e (guide rib 804) while the entrance of the guide groove 807 is open.

By opening the gate valve 820 at the timing when the notch portion 812 holding the game ball facing the guide groove 807 faces the guide groove 807, the game ball held in the notch portion 812 is pushed into the guide groove 807 It can be made to flow down toward the start winning opening 36 via.

For example, when the period of one rotation of the rotary stage 810 is 40 seconds and the gate valve 820 opens every 8 seconds, the gate valve 820 opens at the timing when the notch 812 faces the guide groove 807. , the game ball held in the notch portion 812 is guided into the guide groove 8 every 8 seconds.
At 07, it becomes almost possible to flow down. At this time, when the game balls are held in all the notch portions 512, after the first game ball flows down toward the start winning opening 36, all the remaining game balls are directed toward the starting winning opening 36. It takes 32 seconds to flow down. Note that the notch portion 81
2 requires a predetermined time to flow down the guide groove 807 after receiving the game ball from the warp passage 40e. Considering the case where the game ball directly enters the notch 812[2] from the guide rib 804 when the game ball is arranged as shown in FIG. 56 seconds) and 24 seconds clockwise (64 seconds if one lap behind). Here, if the winning to the start winning opening 36 from other than the guide groove 807 is negligible, the start value S in this case is 7.5 times/minute. Also, the start value S
is 7.5 times/minute, one or more game balls per 8 seconds, that is, 7.5 or more game balls (the number corresponding to the start value S or more) per minute are sent from the warp passage 40e to the rotating stage 810. supply to

Also, for example, consider the case where the gate valve 820 opens every three seconds, and the gate valve 820 opens at the timing when one of the notch portions 812 faces the guide groove 807 in the initial state. In the initial state, the game ball held in the notch 812 [1]
can flow down to After that, [open cycle of gate valve 820 (3 seconds)] and [notch 81
A notch 812 [2] for each product (24 seconds) of the opposing period (8 seconds)]
, the cutout portion 812[3], the cutout portion 812[4], and the game ball held in the cutout portion 812[5] can almost flow down to the guide groove 807 in this order. At this time, when the game balls are held in all the notch portions 512, after the first game ball flows down toward the start winning opening 36, all the remaining game balls are directed toward the starting winning opening 36. It takes 96 seconds to flow down. In this case, since the number of prizes per minute from the guide groove 807 to the starting prize winning port 36 decreases, in order to increase the start value S, the starting prize winning port 3 from other than the guide groove 807
Increase the number of prizes to 6.

On the other hand, the game ball that has flowed down to the rotating stage 810 is placed in the empty notch 81 as shown in [6].
2, as shown in [7], it collides with the game ball (or wall portions 803A, 803B, 803C) held in the notch portion 812 to change the rolling direction, thereby changing the stage portion 40b1 (or the stage portion 40b2). ).

As shown in FIG. 49, when the gate valve 820 opens the entrance of the guide groove 807 at the timing when the guide groove 807 faces the notch 812 that does not hold the game ball, the warp passage 4
Consider a case where a game ball flows down from 0e (guide rib 804) to the rotating stage 810. FIG.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 49, the game balls rolling on the tray portion 801 collide with the wall portion 803C and return to the rotary stage 810 again after coming out of the rotating stage 810. 807, or may enter the guide groove 807 by entering the notch 812 facing thereto. In this way, there is a possibility that even a game ball that has been ejected from the rotating stage 810 once can be re-challenged for winning the starting prize-winning opening 36 .
In particular, the smaller the number of game balls held in the notch portion 812, the higher the possibility of winning a prize in the starting prize-winning opening 36 by re-challenge. In addition, as described above, there is a possibility of entering the guide groove 807 without passing through the notch portion 812 and winning the starting prize opening 36, and the possibility that the stage portion 40b1,
Since there is a possibility that the game ball flowing down 40b2 will enter the start winning opening 36, even if the game ball is held in all the cutouts 812, the value of performing the above re-challenge is not lost.

As described above, considering the case where the gate valve 820 is opened every 8 seconds and the case where it is opened every 3 seconds, the frequency of opening is higher when the gate valve 820 is opened every 3 seconds. There is a high possibility that it will enter the guide groove 807 without passing through the notch 812 facing the 807 .
However, by shortening the opening time of the gate valve 820 (for example, 0.3 seconds), it is possible to reduce the frequency of these occurrences.

The rotary stage 810 rotates counterclockwise at a constant rotational speed, for example, but it can also be controlled to rotate reversely for a short period of time at a predetermined timing. Thereby, for example, when game balls are accumulated between the guide rib 804 and the rotating stage 810, it becomes possible to take them out. Further, after the notch 812 faces the guide groove 807, the rotary stage 810 may be reversely rotated by a minute rotation angle at a stage when the rotation has progressed slightly, and then rotated forward. As a result, even if a game ball is caught between the notch portion 812 and the tray portion 801, this can be resolved. Of course, when the notch 812 faces the guide groove 807, control is performed to stop the rotation of the rotary stage 810 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) so that the game ball can surely flow down to the guide groove 807. good too.

45 to 49, the notches 812 are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the rotary stage 810, but they may be arranged at non-uniform intervals. in this case,
For example, an encoder (not shown) is attached to the rotary stage 810, and the gate valve 820 is opened each time the encoder (not shown) detects a predetermined rotation angle when one of the cutouts 812 faces the guide groove 807. may be configured to operate.

In this embodiment, a configuration in which the gate valve 820 is not used is also suitable. For example, a fixed stage (not shown) having substantially the same dimensions in the surface direction is arranged under the rotating stage 810, and the rotating stage 810 has a plurality of first through holes (larger than the diameter of the game ball) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. diameter), and one second through-hole is formed at a position facing any one of the first through-holes of the fixed stage. Further, a second tray portion (not shown, similar to tray portion 801) is formed under the fixed stage (tray portion 801), and the second tray portion is a second extension portion (not shown, extension portion 80).
6), and has a configuration in which the game ball can flow down toward the start winning opening 36 from the tip of the second extension. When the game ball flows down to the rotation stage 810, the game ball enters the first through hole and is held, and when one of the first through holes communicates with the second through hole, the game ball is held in the first through hole. A game ball can flow down toward the start winning opening 36 through the second through hole, the second tray portion, and the second extension portion. In this case, the cycle in which the game ball can flow down from the second extending portion toward the start winning opening 36 is the value obtained by dividing the [cycle of the rotating stage 810] by the [number of first through holes].

Alternatively, instead of the fixed stage, a movable stage (not shown) having substantially the same dimensions in the surface direction as the rotating stage 810 and moving in the axial direction is arranged below the rotating stage 810, and after a predetermined time elapses, the movable stage moves to the game ball. By moving away from the rotary stage 810 by a distance longer than the diameter of , all the game balls held in the first through holes are supplied to the second tray portion, and the movable stage is returned to its original position, and the ball is on the second tray portion. All the game balls may be made to flow down toward the start winning opening 36. - 特許庁

In the present invention, the guidance means is premised on the rotating body unit 800, but as another configuration, a first stage (not shown) that receives the game ball that has flowed down the warp passage 40e and a Second stage (not shown, placed at the same position as the tray part 801)
and are also applicable.

The first stage is formed of, for example, a transparent member (it may not be transparent), and has a drop mechanism at its center for dropping game balls toward the second stage and irregularly changing the drop timing. ing. The falling mechanism has a tapered inner wall with an obtuse angle (gradual inclination angle) in which the game ball can roll and whose diameter decreases toward the bottom, and a first through hole at the lower end through which the game ball can pass. , is equipped with

The second stage has a plurality of branch paths that branch radially from a position directly below the drop mechanism, and one of the branch paths is arranged so that a game ball can almost win a prize at the starting prize opening. The rest of the branch paths can flow down the game ball toward the game area 32 (rarely toward the start winning opening 36).

A movable part (which can rotate or swing) is arranged at the branch position of the branch path (the position right below the drop mechanism). The movable part has, for example, a direction along the normal line of the second stage as a rotation axis, and has a gently inclined conical shape with the rotation axis as the apex, and has radial irregularities centered on the apex, A plurality of recesses formed by uneven shapes serve as guides that temporarily hold game balls and guide them to branch paths.

A game ball that has flowed down to the first stage from the warp passage 40e can enter the dropping mechanism from any direction. The route to reach changes irregularly for each game ball. Therefore, the falling timing of the game ball that has flowed down to the falling mechanism changes irregularly.

Since the game ball that has fallen from the first through hole falls near the top of the movable part, the direction in which it rolls from the top of the movable part is irregular, and the direction in which the game ball is guided depends on the timing of the game ball falling. It changes depending on the direction of rotation, the rotational speed of the movable part, the phase (orientation of the recess), and the like. Therefore, which branch path the game ball flows down also varies irregularly for each game ball.

However, since the number of branch paths is finite, the number of downflow paths for game balls is smaller than the number of downflow paths for game balls that flow down only in game areas where windmills and obstacle nails are arranged. Therefore, the frequency (probability density) in which a fixed number of game balls can enter the start prize-winning opening 36 within a predetermined time is higher than that of the conventional game machine, and the start value S is thereby stabilized.

In addition, it is possible to visually recognize how the game ball falls from the drop mechanism and how the game ball is distributed to the branch path by the movable part and enters the start winning opening, which makes the player interested in the movement of the game ball. By doing so, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

As another configuration, a configuration in which a guide groove 807 is provided under the second stage (without branched channels) may be used. At this time, at least one of the recesses forming the uneven shape of the movable portion is a slit (notch) through which the game ball can pass. A second through hole through which a game ball can pass is formed at a position directly below the movable part of the second stage, and when the slit and the second through hole reach a predetermined angle, the slit and the second through hole communicate with each other. Also, the game ball that has flowed down through the second through-hole flows down into the guide groove 807 .

When the game ball dropped from the drop mechanism flows down into the slit at the timing when the slit and the second through hole communicate with each other, the game ball that has flowed down into the slit flows down into the guide groove 807 via the second through hole and starts winning. It flows down towards mouth 36 . The game ball that did not flow down to the second through hole in the second stage is the second stage (stage part 40b1 or stage part 40b2)
You may make it flow down toward the game area 32 (rarely the starting prize-winning mouth 36) via.

Here, the slit and the second through-hole may be formed so as to have a width and a diameter larger than those of the concave portion forming the concave-convex shape of the movable portion.

Furthermore, the warp passage 40e is branched using a sorting device 850 or the like, which will be described later. can be A movable part is interposed between the lower end of the branch passage and the second through hole. It may flow down to the second through hole, and at other timings, flow down toward the game area 32 (rarely the start winning opening 36) via the second stage (stage portion 40b1 or stage portion 40b2).

Also, instead of the rotating body unit 800, a swinging member having grooves in which game balls can roll may be used. The swinging member swings (oscillates, swings) about a substantially vertical axis at a predetermined cycle, and one end of the groove faces the lower end of the warp passage 40e (or the guide rib 804) every half cycle. The other end of the groove oscillates (vibrates) so as to face the guide groove 807 . Note that the gate valve 820 may not be provided. If the groove and the guide groove 807 are given a certain width, even with such a configuration, the game ball can be made to enter the starting prize opening 36 periodically (every half cycle), and the start value S can be stabilized.

[Control system]
FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the game control system of the game machine 10 of the third embodiment.
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure game processing of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50 , the game control device 100 can control the drive/stop of the rotary stage motor 143 that rotates the rotary stage 810 and the valve solenoid 144 that drives the gate valve 820 . That is, the game microcomputer 111 that constitutes the game control device 100 rotates the rotary stage 810 via the data bus 140, the output port 141, and the fifth driver 138e.
A control signal can be sent to the rotary stage motor 143 regarding the rotational speed of (including reverse rotation). Similarly, the game microcomputer 111 can transmit a timing signal to the valve solenoid 144 of the gate valve 820 at the timing of opening the gate valve 820 .
The control signal is a signal for rotating the rotary stage 810 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 40 seconds as described above). A timing signal is applied to gate valve 82 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., 8 seconds and 3 seconds above).
It is a signal that drives 0.

The game control device 100 includes a first proximity switch 72a, a second proximity switch 72b (third detecting means), a third proximity switch 72c (first detection means) and the detection signal transmitted from the fourth proximity switch 72d (second detection means) are input. In addition, the game control device 100 can transmit drive signals to the valve solenoids 144, 145, and 146, which will be described later, via the output port 141 and the fifth driver 138e.

The game control device 100, for example, when a touch switch signal is input from the operation handle 24 (or when the drive of the ball launching device is detected), the control signal and timing to rotate the rotation stage 810 in the forward direction (counterclockwise) Signal transmission can begin.

In addition, the game control device 100 uses the winning opening switch 35a instead of the touch switch signal.
When the customer waiting state of the game machine 10 is canceled by inputting a signal for detecting a game ball such as the starting port 1 switch 36a, transmission of a control signal and a timing signal for rotating the rotary stage 810 in the forward direction is performed. can start.

Then, the game control device 100 stops the transmission of the control signal and the timing signal during the right-handed state (or the left-handed state) such as the jackpot state, the time-saving state, or the probability variable state (excluding the latent probability variable state), When the right-handed state (or left-handed state) ends, the transmission of the control signal and the timing signal for rotating the rotary stage 810 in the forward direction can be resumed. This avoids the power consumption of the rotary stage 810 during right-handed hitting, and the holding number (
It is possible to prevent the game balls held on the rotating stage 810 from entering the start winning opening 36 uselessly when the starting memory number) is the maximum.

Further, the game control device 100, for example, when a latent probability change (other specific game state than this) occurs, then for a predetermined time (latency probability change continues even after the predetermined time has elapsed)
, or stop the control signal (or send a control signal to rotate in the opposite direction (clockwise)) until the latent probability change is completed, and stop sending the timing signal (the gate valve 820 opens the entrance of the guide groove 807 After that, a control signal and a timing signal for rotating the rotation stage 810 in the forward direction may be transmitted. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player the occurrence of the probability change of latency.

Then, in a state where the rotation stage 810 is rotating during the occurrence period of the latency probability variation as described above, for example, when the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable prize winning device 37 detects a game ball, the rotation stage 810 is controlled to rotate. Stop the signal. When the latency probability change occurs, the control signal and the timing signal for rotating the rotation stage 810 in the forward direction may be transmitted from the beginning so that the rotation stage 810 does not indicate the latency probability change.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 can end the transmission of the control signal and the timing signal when it enters the customer waiting state (FIG. 10, step A3212). As a result, power consumption during customer waiting can be reduced. Of course, it is possible to transmit the control signal and the timing signal even while waiting for customers in the same way as during the game.

The RAM 111c constituting the gaming microcomputer 111 stores the rotation speed information and the timing information associated with the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 as described above. Therefore,
The game microcomputer 111 can appropriately select the rotation speed information and the timing information based on the state of the game machine 10 and transmit the control signal and the timing signal.

In addition, the game microcomputer 111 can transmit a control signal and a timing signal in association with the effect control command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300, and rotate the rotating stage 810 in the forward or reverse direction depending on the content of the effect. can also

As shown in FIG. 51, in the special figure game process of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, for example, the movable body control process (step A2619) is executed after the symbol variation control process. In the movable body control process (step A2619), the game control device 100 determines the state of the gaming machine 10 (waiting for a customer, playing a game, hitting right, etc.), and outputs a control signal and a timing signal based on the state. Send.

The state of the gaming machine 10 can also be identified by various commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 . Therefore, the rotary stage motor 1
43 and the valve solenoid 144 can be controlled by the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 controls the rotation stage motor 143 and the valve solenoid 144 to the board effect device 44 .
can be controlled as That is, the effect control device 300 can transmit the control signal and the timing signal based on various commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . As a result, the game control device 100 does not transmit the control signal and the timing signal, so the processing load of the game control device 100 can be reduced accordingly.

By the way, the game control device 100 (and the effect control device 300) starts a variable display game on the display device 41 when a game ball wins in the starting prize winning port 36. FIG. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 44, 45, and 46, the rotator unit 800 (rotating stage 810) is visible to the player. Therefore, there is a risk that the player will pay attention to the behavior of the game ball rolling on the rotating stage 810 and the tray portion 801 and will not pay attention to the variable display game.

Therefore, it is preferable to set the duration of the special figure variation display game (that is, the variation time) to be substantially the same as the cycle of flowing down from the rotating stage 810 (guiding groove 807) toward the start winning opening 36. As a result, the state in which the game ball starts flowing down from the rotating stage 810 is repeated with the end of the variable display game. You can avoid the situation of focusing only on the unit.

For example, assuming that the cycle of the rotating stage 810 is 40 seconds and the time interval at which the gate valve 820 is opened is 8 seconds, the cycle in which the game ball flows down from the notch 812 toward the start winning opening 36 is 8. Seconds, it is preferable that the variable display game is started when the game ball wins, and the duration is about 8 seconds. Assuming that the cycle of the rotating stage 810 is 40 seconds and the time interval for opening the gate valve 820 is 3 seconds as described above, the cycle in which the game ball flows down from the notch 812 toward the start winning opening 36 is 24. Since it is seconds, it is preferable that the variable display game is started when the game ball wins, and the duration is about 24 seconds.

In addition to the above, the duration (variation time) of the special figure variation display game may be longer or shorter than the cycle in which the game ball flows down from the notch 812 toward the start winning opening 36. It may be longer than the cycle of rotating stage 810 . Also, the duration of the variable display game may be the same as the product of the [predetermined coefficient] and the [cycle of the rotating stage 810], or may be longer or shorter than that. Here, the [predetermined coefficient] is "N"=4 when the cycle of the timer interrupt of the CPU 11a (FIG. 50) is Nms=4ms, or the opening time Mms=100ms of the special variable prize winning device 39 for a small hit or the like. 'M'=100 can be used if .

Also, a first proximity switch 72a (FIGS. 45 and 50) for detecting a game ball is attached at any position of the warp passage 40e, and when the game ball passes through the first proximity switch 72a, the display device 41: The counted number of game balls passing through the first proximity switch 72a is displayed, and when the counted number exceeds the set count value, it becomes zero and becomes a state that can be counted again, and the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 after that is displayed. (1 or more may be applied continuously) using the reservation display generated by winning a prize may be performed with higher expectation (reliability) than usual. Alternatively, when the count number exceeds the set count value, the variable time of the variable display game related to suspension (starting memory) is lengthened,
An effect (here, zone effect) with a high degree of expectation that the special figure variation display game currently being executed (the variation) is a big hit may appear to make the player expect and pay attention to the display device 41.例文帳に追加

The zone production is performed, for example, by the entire display device 41, and is a production in which the background color is changed to a different color (eg, red) from the normal case (eg, blue), and the expectation of a bigger hit than in the normal case. Set it to a high degree. In addition, when the count number exceeds the set count value, the effect already set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 29, B2006) may be changed to execute the zone effect (between B0014 and B0017 of the main process such processing steps may be provided).

Note that the zone performance may be executed as a look-ahead zone performance when the count number exceeds the set count value and then a hold with a high expectation of a big win occurs, instead of the zone performance for the above change. The look-ahead zone effect is performed by the look-ahead pattern command processing (
B1214) and prefetch variation command processing (B1216). In addition, although a highly anticipated hold has already occurred, it is possible to configure not to perform a hold change notice effect (highly expected hold change notice effect) related to the hold, and in this case, the count number is the set count. When the value is exceeded, the look-ahead zone effect related to the hold may be immediately executed, and at that time the hold change notice effect related to the hold may also be executed (it does not have to be executed). Note that the zone effect can be terminated when the suspension is completed.

The first proximity switch 72a may detect a game ball when it passes through it, for example, like the specific area switch 72. Second proximity switch 72b, third proximity switch 72c, and fourth proximity switch 72b to be described later. The same applies to the proximity switch 72d.

In addition, the pending change notice effect is performed by the effect control device 300 in the look-ahead symbol system command process (B1
214) and the look-ahead variation command processing (B1216), and changes the pending display corresponding to the starting memory from the normal color (white) to a different color (for example, blue, green, red). .

Control of the production can be performed by the game control device 100 and the production control device 300 (see below). By performing such an effect, both the display device 41 displaying the variable display game and the rotator unit 800 can be gazed at, thereby avoiding a state in which only the rotator unit 800 is gazed at. A signal of the first proximity switch 72a or the like may be directly input to the effect control device 300 to execute such effect without going through the game control device 100. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when the game state of the gaming machine 10 is the normal game state and the game balls are held in all of the cutouts 812 of the rotary stage 810, the player makes a stop strike (a state in which the game balls are not shot). can be considered. On the other hand, as described above, all the game balls introduced into the game area 32 do not flow down to the rotator unit 800, but the lower left area of the game area 32, that is, without passing through the rotator unit 800 (some Rotating stage 81 jumps up from the area
0), it also flows down to the starting winning port 36 where it is possible to win.

Therefore, when it is detected that the game ball is at a specific position in the lower left area of the game area 32, the upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) or the display device 41 may be used to perform an effect to encourage the continuation of shooting the game ball. preferred.

For example, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35 (winning area), or the second proximity switch 72b (third detection When the means (Fig. 44, Fig. 50) detects a game ball, the upper effect unit 40
At c, a predetermined count value (initial value) is displayed (lighted display), and the count value counts down at predetermined time intervals. When the game ball is detected again in the area during the countdown, the count value returns to the initial value and starts counting down again to prevent the count value from reaching zero.

On the other hand, the display device 41 displays a display prompting the shooting of game balls so that the count value does not become zero, and when the mini-game is successfully continued for a predetermined time, the display device 41
, a pending change notice effect with a higher expectation than usual (other highly expected effects may be used)
Or perform an effect that suggests the probability setting value.

Here, the ``pending change notice effect with higher expectations than usual'' is, for example, an effect in which the expectation indicated by the pending display increases in multiple stages by repeating the success of the above-mentioned mini-game (for example, It is possible to change the color of the pending display step by step (not from blue to red but from blue to green to red). This makes it possible to draw attention to the display device 41 and prevent the stop shot. At that time, it is possible to avoid applying the effect to the holding corresponding to the losing, and to increase the contrast between the waiting for the losing and the waiting for the big win. As a result, attention can be drawn to the display device 41, and the effect of preventing stop shots can be enhanced. Of course, if the mini-game fails, or if the execution is interrupted, the expectations implied by the pending display will return.

In addition, as "other highly expected effects", in a special figure variable display game that is started after the mini game has been successfully continued for a predetermined time, for example, a group of characters such as fish and animals move in one direction. It is possible to execute the group forewarning effect that displays to indicate that the group is moving or the zone effect described above. In addition, when the mini-game succeeds in continuing for a predetermined time (in the special figure variation display game being executed), the cut-in notice or dialogue notice is executed on the display device 41 as ``another highly expected effect''. you can In this way, the player becomes interested in continuing the mini-game for a predetermined period of time even with the ``other highly anticipated effects''.

Furthermore, as the ``effect that suggests the probability setting value'', for example, specific identification information is displayed in the winning pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game that starts after the mini game has been successfully continued for a predetermined time. It is possible to suggest probability settings (Fig. 29, B2012
). For example, if the probability setting value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), "135" is set as the stop symbol, and if it is an even number (2, 4, 6), "246" is set as the stop symbol. good. Also, "1", "2", "135"("246") with a predetermined probability (for example, 5%)
Any one pattern of "3"("2","4","6") is displayed larger than the other two. Then, it may be suggested with a high probability (for example, 90%) that the numerical value associated with the symbol is the set probability value. Alternatively, as the "effect suggesting the set probability value", a specific character image appears on the display device 41 and specified by the color of the character image as a effect independent of the effect related to the special figure variation display game being executed. is more likely than other probability settings. In this way, the player will be interested in continuing the mini-game for a predetermined period of time, since the "effect suggesting the set probability value" is a privilege.

Specifically, for example, the game control device 100 controls the gate switch 34a to control the above effect.
It is started when a detection signal is not input for a predetermined time from any switch for detecting game balls. Alternatively, it is started when the winning opening switch 35a and the second proximity switch 72b detect a game ball. At this time, the game control device 100 notifies the count value (initial value) and transmits to the effect control device 300 a count value command (initial value) for performing a display prompting the continuation of firing, and counts down at predetermined time intervals. A count value command for notifying the count value obtained is transmitted to the effect control device 300. - 特許庁

Then, the game control device 100 transmits a count value command (initial value) to the effect control device 300 when a detection signal is input from the winning opening switch 35a or the second proximity switch 72b before the count value becomes zero. The effect control device 300 displays the count value on the upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) according to the count value command, and performs a display prompting the continuation of shooting the game ball on the display device 41 (it may not be performed). And game control device 100
transmits a predetermined command to the effect control device 300 when the duration of the mini game exceeds a predetermined time. Then, the effect control device 300, which has received a predetermined command, uses the subsequently generated pending display to perform a pending change notice effect with a higher degree of expectation (reliability) than usual, or an effect suggesting a probability set value. I do. By performing such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping.

The signals of the first proximity switch 72a and the second proximity switch 72b may be directly input to the effect control device 300 to execute such mini games and effects without the game control device 100.

When the winning hole switch 35a and the second proximity switch 72b detect a game ball, an effect image may be displayed on the upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) or the display device 41, or an effect sound may be output from the speaker 19. You can put it out. As for the effect image, if the upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) is used, for example, it is possible to apply a mode in which the displayed count value is surrounded by an explosion outline (balloon) for a predetermined period of time. Moreover, if it is the display device 41, the aspect which displays the moving image which a transparent (or translucent) bubble climbs up from the bottom is applicable.

In addition, in this embodiment, by monitoring how the game ball is held on the rotating stage 810,
It is also preferable to have the player gaze at the display device 41 by displaying it on the display device 41 .
For example, each notch 812 is provided with a fifth proximity switch (not shown, similar to the first proximity switch, etc.), and the fifth proximity switch is electrically connected to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 , a command indicating that the valve solenoid 144 (FIG. 50) has been driven is input from the game control device 100 . Then, the effect control device 300 displays an image simulating the rotating stage 810 in a screen corner of the display device 41, or in a region different from the variable display region, the pending display region, and the effect display region, and the game in each notch portion 812. The presence or absence of the ball and the opening/closing state of the gate valve 820 may be displayed.

For example, the display device 41 is provided with a sixth proximity switch (not shown, similar to the first proximity switch or the like) for detecting a game ball passing through the guide rib 804, and the effect control device 300 detects that the sixth proximity switch is the game Each time a ball is detected, a moving image of the game ball entering the rotating stage 810 from the guide rib 804 is displayed on the screen, and when the fifth proximity switch detects the game ball, the game ball enters the corresponding notch portion 812 on the screen. The state is displayed so that the state in which the game ball is actually held in the notch 812 can be reflected on the screen. Incidentally, when the ball shooting device operates or the player touches the ball shooting device (when the touch switch signal is detected), it may be displayed on the screen how the game ball enters the rotation stage 810 from the guide rib 804. . With these configurations, the player can grasp the status of the rotating stage 810 on the display device 41 without looking at the rotating stage 810 .

Regardless of whether the game ball is actually detected by the fifth proximity switch or the sixth proximity switch, a predetermined timing such as when the left-handed state starts (or when the left-handed instruction display is displayed) Alternatively, a moving image (or a still image) of the game ball entering the rotating stage 810 may be displayed on the display device 41 to urge the player to let the game ball flow down to the rotating stage 810 .

Also, a role may be given to the notch portion 812 on the display. For example, when a game ball enters the notch 812, the player is given a performance point, three of the five notches 812 are 1 point, one of the remaining two is 5 points, and the other is 10 points. is given.
The effect points are, for example, points necessary for executing the above-described mini-game, and 100 points, for example, are consumed per mini-game. By giving the player mini-game effect points in this way, it is possible to give the player an incentive to cause the game balls to flow down one after another on the rotating stage 810 . The effect control device 300 controls the above-mentioned point provision (FIG. 23: B0012) and its display (FIG. 29: B2002, B2004, B200
7) can be performed. Here, the effect control device 300 preferably displays the current number of points and the number of consumed points for the mini game at a position on the display device 41 that does not overlap other displays.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, most of the game balls flowing down from the extension portion 806 (guiding groove 807) enter the start winning port 36, but as described above, they collide with other game balls and win. may not. In addition, not only the game ball flowing down from the extending portion 806 (guiding groove 807), but also other game balls may enter the start winning opening 36 in some cases. Therefore, the guide groove 807 is also provided with a seventh proximity switch (not shown, similar to the first proximity switch, etc.), the seventh proximity switch is electrically connected to the production control device 300, and the starting port 1 switch 36a A command corresponding to the detection is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 . And production control device 300
compares the number of times the seventh proximity switch detects a game ball with the number of times the starting port 1 switch 36a detects a game ball at predetermined time intervals (for example, the above 40 seconds and 96 seconds), and the starting port 1 switch 36a
If the number of game ball detections is greater, for example, characters such as "Good condition, let's keep going!" may display characters such as "You'll be fine next time!" By providing a display that encourages the player in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping.

The fifth proximity switch, the sixth proximity switch, and the seventh proximity switch are electrically connected to the game control device 100, and a command indicating that the fifth proximity switch has been detected from the game control device 100 is issued. You may send to the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG.

[First modification]
FIG. 52A shows a rotator unit 800 that constitutes a first modification of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment.
45 (a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 44). In the first modification, a component that changes the rolling direction of the game ball is added to the rotating body unit 800 . As shown in FIG.
One or a plurality of obstacle nails 830 (rolling direction changing members) are implanted (arranged) at a position different from the position where the notch 812 of the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 is arranged. By planting an obstacle nail 830 on the rotating stage 810, the game ball is temporarily retained on the rotating stage 810, and the rolling direction of the game ball flowing down from the warp passage 40e to the rotating stage 810 is changed irregularly. Interest can be improved.

When one obstacle nail 830 is to be planted, it can be planted at any position other than the notch 812 of the rotary stage 810 . When a plurality of obstacle nails 830 are to be planted, it is desirable to plant the obstacle nails 830 so that the distance between adjacent obstacle nails 830 is larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can roll toward the center of the rotary stage 810, and the game ball at the center can also roll toward the notch portion 812 or the tray portion 801, and the game ball can be played on the entire rotary stage 810. You can roll the ball randomly.

When a plurality of obstructing nails 830 are to be planted, for example, as shown in FIG. In FIG. 52, 5
Since the two notch portions 812 are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (five-fold symmetry), the obstacle nail 83
The 0's are also planted so as to have five-fold symmetry (pentagram shape). As a result, the game ball can be directed toward any of the cutouts 812 with the same probability. Of course, the obstacle nail 830 may be arranged in a circular shape concentric with the rotary stage 810 (a circular shape with a smaller radius than the radius of the rotary stage 810) and arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction.

Also, on the game area 32 side of the tray portion 801, it is preferable to arrange a rebounding member 840 (for example, a slingshot, a flipper) that rebounds the game ball that has flowed down toward the rotating stage 810. FIG. The rebounding member 840 is a member that rebounds the game ball toward the upper side of the inclined rolling surface 802 or the rolling surface 811 (direction away from the game area 32) by mechanically (or electrically) operating when the game ball is received. is.

As a form of bouncing the game ball, like the bouncing member 840 shown on the left side of FIG.
There is a mode in which the tray portion 801 is directed toward the game area 32 to receive a game ball that rolls at a substantially right angle, and is directly bounced toward the rotation stage 810 . Also, the rebound member 840 shown on the right side of FIG.
, the game ball rolling at a shallow angle toward the game area 32 is received and bounced upward from the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801, and then the game ball is received by the wall portions 803A, 803B, 80
There is a mode in which it can be reflected at 3C and rolled toward the rotation stage 810 . In either case, since the game ball rolling on the rotary stage 810 is directed toward the rotary stage 810 again, the game ball is temporarily retained on the tray portion 801 or the rotary stage 810, and the notch portion 8
12 can increase the expectation of holding the game ball.

In the first modified example, both the obstacle nail 830 and the rebound member 840 are arranged in the rotating body unit 800, but only one of them may be provided.

[Second modification]
FIG. 52B is a plan view (cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 44) of a rotor unit 800 that constitutes a second modification of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. In the second modification, a second rotation stage 890 that rotates coaxially with the rotation stage 810 is provided at the center of the rotation stage 810 instead of the obstructing nail 830 of the first modification. The rotary stage 810 is hollowed out in a cylindrical shape, and a second rotary stage 890 is arranged in the hollowed out portion. Second rotary stage 89
0 is arranged so as to be slightly exposed from the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 . In addition, a plurality of (three in FIG. 52B) second notch portions 891 (second holding portions) capable of accommodating game balls are arranged side by side in the circumferential direction of the second rotary stage 890 .

The radial opening of the second notch 891 is open, and the second notch 891 is open.
is substantially flush with the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 . Therefore, the game ball rolling on the rotary stage 810 easily enters the second notch 891 and is held. On the other hand, since the second notch 891 does not have a member that closes the radial opening, if the radial opening of the second notch 891 faces the play area 32 (downward tilting), the game ball held in the second notch 891 can be easily released from the radial opening of the second notch 891 . By applying this second rotating stage 890, it is possible to improve interest in the rolling direction of the game ball.

It should be noted that the rotation direction of the second rotation stage 890 is preferably opposite to (or may be the same as) the rotation direction of the rotation stage 810 . The rotation period of the second rotation stage 890 may be synchronized with the rotation period of the rotation stage 810 . Also, the rotation period of the second rotation stage 890 may be half the rotation period of the rotation stage 810, or may be asynchronous and an arbitrary rotation period may be applied.

Further, the second rotation stage 890 can be driven by a motor different from that of the rotation stage 810, or the same motor as that of the rotation stage 810 (rotation stage motor 14).
3) can also be driven. The rotation stage 81 replaces the second rotation stage 890 with the rotation stage 81 .
0, the rotation stage 810 and the second rotation stage 890
are mechanically coupled by gears and the gear ratio is appropriately designed, the rotation ratio between the rotation stage 810 and the second rotation stage 890 can be appropriately designed.

[Third modification]
FIG. 53 is a perspective view of a third modified example of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is a schematic diagram of a sorting device 850 that constitutes a third modification of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the third modification, a sorting device 850 is arranged in the middle of the warp passage 40e.
The sorting device 850 includes a first branched channel 851 that branches at a position in the middle of the warp passage 40e,
A first switching valve 853 ( a second valve) and a third proximity switch 72c for detecting a game ball in the warp passage 40e;
(first detection means, FIGS. 50 and 54); The outlet 852 of the first branch channel 851 (
53) communicates with the game area 32 (the game area 32 that does not pass through the rotating body unit 800). By applying this sorting device 850, the number of game balls flowing down to the rotating stage 810 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), the first switching valve 853 has a biasing means (such as a spring) such that a portion of the warp passage 40e upstream of the first switching valve 853 normally communicates with the rotation stage 810 side. ) is rotated by the biasing force. Then, every time the third proximity switch 72c detects a predetermined number of game balls, the valve solenoid 145 (FIG. 50) is driven to rotate the first switching valve 853 in the reverse direction, and As shown in , the portion upstream of the first switching valve 853 of the warp passage 40e communicates with the first branch flow path 851 (game area 32). Furthermore, when the third proximity switch 72c next detects a game ball that has flowed down to the warp passage 40e, the valve solenoid 14
5 is stopped, and the biasing force of biasing means (not shown) rotates the first switching valve 853 to its original position. It should be noted that the first switching valve 853 is
and the direction of rotation of the first switching valve 853 by the driving force of the valve solenoid 145 may be opposite to each other.

The game control device 100 counts the number of detection signals input from the third proximity switch 72c, and each time the count reaches the set count value, it returns to zero and becomes countable again, and the first switching A valve solenoid 145 (
50), and stops the drive signal when the detection signal is input next time (FIG. 50).
). Alternatively, the sorting device 850 may include a counter (not shown), and the counter (not shown) may transmit and stop the drive signal in the same manner as the game control device 100. By changing the set count value, the distribution ratio of the game balls in the distribution device 850 can be arbitrarily changed. In any case, according to the third modified example, adjustment can be made so that the number of game balls flowing down to the rotating stage 810 does not increase excessively.

In addition, without providing the third proximity switch 72c (without counting game balls), the first switching valve 853 is rotated at a predetermined cycle and maintained for a certain period of time, and the flow path of the game ball is first branched. You may make it switch to the flow path 851. FIG. Also in this way, the number of game balls flowing down to the rotating stage 810 can be adjusted.

[Fourth modification]
FIG. 55 is a front view of a fourth modification of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of a first distribution unit 860 (distribution unit) that constitutes a fourth modification of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the fourth modification, a first distribution unit 860 for distributing whether or not to distribute game balls to the rotating body unit 800 is arranged. The first sorting unit 860 is arranged at a position upstream of the game ball from the inflow port 40 a of the game area 32 .

The first sorting unit 860 includes a unit main body 861, an introduction port 862 arranged in the upper part of the unit main body 861 for introducing game balls, and an outlet arranged in the lower part of the unit main body 861 for discharging the game balls to the game area 32 again. 863, and a second intake channel 864 extending from the unit main body 861 and communicating with the inlet 40a (rotator unit 800).

Here, an obstacle nail (not shown) is planted at a position above the introduction port 862 of the game area 32, but the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the game area 32 has an arbitrary ratio (probability density is implanted so that it flows down into inlet 862 at the maximum rate, for example 50 percent.

The second intake channel 864 communicates the inlet 862 and the inlet 40a. From a position in the middle of the second intake channel 864 in the unit main body 861 , the second branch channel 865
is branched, and the second branch channel 865 communicates with the discharge port 863 . Also, the second intake channel 8
At the branch position of the second branch flow path 865 of 64, the flow path of the game ball flowing down from the introduction port 862 flows down toward the inflow port 40a (downstream portion from the branch position of the second intake flow path 864). A second switching valve 866 (third valve) capable of switching between the flow path and the flow path flowing down toward the second branch flow path 865 is attached. In addition, in the second intake channel 864, the second intake channel 8
A fourth proximity switch 72d (second detecting means, FIG. 50) for detecting a game ball that has flowed down to 64 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 56(a), the second switching valve 866 is normally arranged so that the portion upstream of the second switching valve 866 of the second intake channel 864 communicates with the second branch channel 865. It is Then, every time the fourth proximity switch 72d detects a predetermined number of game balls, it is driven, and as shown in FIG. communicates with the inflow port 40a (rotator unit 800).

Conversely, as shown in FIG.
The upstream portion may be arranged to communicate with the inlet 40a (rotator unit 800). Then, the fourth proximity switch 72d is driven each time a predetermined number of game balls are detected, and as shown in FIG. may communicate with the second branch channel 865 .

The game control device 100 counts the number of detection signals input from the fourth proximity switch 72d, and returns to zero each time the count reaches the set count value, and becomes ready to count again. A valve solenoid 146 (
50), and stops the drive signal when the detection signal is input next time (FIG. 50).
). Alternatively, the first sorting unit 860 may include a counter (not shown), and the counter (not shown) may transmit and stop the drive signal like the game control device 100. By changing the set count value, the distribution ratio of the game balls in the first distribution unit 860 can be arbitrarily changed.

In addition, without providing the fourth proximity switch 72d (without counting the game balls), by rotating the first switching valve 853 at a predetermined cycle and maintaining it for a certain period of time, the flow path of the game balls is changed to the second You may make it switch to the branch flow path 865. FIG. Even in this way, the number of game balls that flow down to the inflow port 40a and the rotating stage 810 can be adjusted.

[Fifth Modification]
FIG. 57 shows a second sorting unit 8 that constitutes a fifth modification of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment.
It is a schematic diagram of 70 (distribution unit). FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram showing how the second sorting unit 870 sorts game balls. In the fifth modification, rotating body unit 8
The second sorting unit 870 that sorts whether or not to sort the game balls to 00 is arranged at the same position as the first sorting unit 860 of the fourth modification, but the sorting can be performed mechanically.

The second sorting unit 870 of the fifth modification includes an introduction port 872 into which game balls are introduced, two discharge ports 873 from which game balls are discharged, and communicates with the introduction ports 872 and branches downward from the middle. A Y-shaped flow path 874 (third branched flow path) communicating with the two discharge ports 873, respectively, and two discharge ports 8 that are arranged at the branch positions of the Y-shaped flow channel 874 and switch each time a game ball is received.
It is provided with a plurality of distributing mechanisms 871 including a third switching valve 875 for alternately flowing game balls toward 73 .

The sorting mechanism 871 is connected in series in such a manner that one discharge port 873 of the sorting mechanism 871 at the front stage communicates with the introduction port 872 of the sorting mechanism 871 at the rear stage. At least one of the discharge ports 873 (not communicating with the introduction ports 872) that terminates in the plurality of distribution mechanisms 871 communicates with the inlet 40a (rotator unit 800). In FIG. 57, the distribution mechanism 871 is arranged in series in four stages (distribution mechanisms 871A, 871B,
871C, 871D). Note that the number of stages of the distribution mechanism 871 is arbitrary, and the ratio of the game balls to be flown into the inflow port 40a to the game balls that have been shot (start value S
(depending on the design value of ). Also, the smaller the number of stages of the sorting mechanism 871 (especially if it is one stage), the more advantageous it is in terms of cost.

The operation of the sorting mechanism 871 will be described with reference to FIG. A third switching valve 875 (switching valve) that constitutes the distribution mechanism 871 is composed of a rotating member 876 and a stopper portion 883 that abuts on the rotating member 876 to limit the rotation of the rotating member 876 . (Fig. 57
) is located at the branch position.

The rotating member 876 has an inverted T shape obtained by turning the T shape upside down. It has a rotating shaft 880 extending in a direction. The rotating member 876 includes an upright portion 877 forming an inverted T-shaped vertical bar portion, a right bottom portion 878 forming a portion of the inverted T-shaped horizontal bar portion on the right side of the rotation axis 880, and an inverted T-shaped portion. A left bottom portion 8 forming a portion on the left side of the rotation axis 880 of the horizontal bar portion of
79 and.

The stopper member 883 is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the right bottom portion 878 or the left bottom portion 879 . That is, as shown in FIG. 58(a), when the rotating member 876 rotates clockwise, the right bottom portion 878 abuts against the stopper member 883. At this time, the upright portion 877 is inclined upward to the right from the rotating shaft 880, and is positioned to the left. The bottom portion 879 is inclined upward and leftward from the rotating shaft 880 . Conversely, as shown in FIG. 58(b), when the rotating member 876 rotates counterclockwise, the left bottom portion 879 abuts against the stopper member 883, and at this time, the standing portion 877 tilts upward to the left from the rotating shaft 880. As a result, the right bottom portion 878 is inclined upward to the right from the rotation shaft 880 .

Here, in FIG. 58(a) or FIG. 58(b), the center of gravity of the standing portion 877 and the right bottom portion 878
and the left bottom portion 879 . Therefore, the moment (torque) given to the rotating shaft 880 by the standing portion 877 due to gravity and the moment (torque) given to the rotating shaft 880 by the right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879 due to gravity are opposite to each other. However, the moment associated with the upright portion 877 is the right bottom portion 878
and the moment associated with the left bottom portion 879. Therefore, the state of FIG. 58(a) or FIG. 58(b) is stably maintained as long as the game ball does not abut.

Therefore, when the rotating member 876 is set free, the right bottom portion 878 contacts the stopper member 883 as shown in FIG. 58(a), or the left bottom portion 879 contacts the stopper member 883 as shown in FIG. It will be in either of the abutting states, and the standing portion 877 will stand vertically (
It rarely comes to rest with the right bottom 878 and left bottom 879 kept horizontal). Also, even if the standing portion 877 stands still in a vertical position, the rotating member 876 is rotated in either direction by the game ball contacting the rotating member 876, so that the right bottom portion 878 or the left bottom portion 879 contacts the stopper member 883 .

The side surface of the right bottom portion 878 side of the standing portion 877 and the upper surface of the right bottom portion 878 form a right receiving portion 881 for receiving a game ball, and the side surface of the standing portion 877 on the left bottom portion 879 side and the upper surface of the left bottom portion 879 receive a game ball. It is a left receiving portion 882 for receiving. Therefore, the game ball flowing down from the introduction port 872 is
It is temporarily held by the right receiving portion 881 or the left receiving portion 882 .

As shown in FIG. 58(a), when the left receiving portion 882 receives and temporarily holds the game ball,
The game ball is arranged at a position biased toward the left bottom portion 879 side from the rotating shaft 880 . At this time, the moment given to the rotating shaft 880 by the game ball due to gravity and the moment given to the rotating shaft 880 by the rotating member 876 (the difference between the moment of the upright portion 877 and the moment of the bottom consisting of the right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879) are Although the directions are opposite to each other, the moment related to the game ball is larger than the moment related to the rotating member 876 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the rotary member 876 rotates counterclockwise toward the left bottom portion 879 while holding the game ball.
contacts the stopper member 883 . At this time, since the left bottom portion 879 is inclined downward to the left from the rotating shaft 880, the game ball rolls on the left bottom portion 879 toward the tip of the left bottom portion 879, is separated from the rotating member 876, and is discharged to one outlet. Run down towards 873. Also, the standing portion 877 is arranged to be inclined upward to the left from the rotating shaft 880 . As described above, the moment that the standing portion 877 gives to the rotating shaft 880 is such that the bottom portion (the right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879)
80, the left bottom portion 879 maintains a state of contact with the stopper member 883 even after the game ball is separated from the rotating member 876, and the right receiving portion 881 can receive the next game ball. Become.

Then, when the next game ball flows down from the inlet 872, the game ball is received and temporarily held by the right receiving portion 881 as shown in FIG. 58(b). At this time, FIG.
As shown in (b), in the arrangement in which the right receiving portion 881 receives the game ball, the game ball is arranged at a position biased toward the right bottom portion 878 side of the rotating shaft 880 . In this case as well, for the same reason as above, FIG.
As shown in 8 ( a ), the rotating member 876 rotates toward the right bottom portion 878 while holding the game ball, and the right bottom portion 878 contacts the stopper member 883 . At this time, the right bottom portion 878 is
Since the game ball is inclined downward to the right from 80 , the game ball rolls on the right bottom portion 878 toward the tip of the right bottom portion 878 , separates from the rotating member 876 , and flows down toward the discharge port 873 on the other side. Also, the upright portion 877 is inclined upward to the right from the rotation shaft 880 . For the same reason as above, even after the game ball is separated from the rotating member 876, the right bottom portion 878 maintains the state of contact with the stopper member 883, and the left receiving portion 882 can receive the next game ball. .

As described above, the third switching valve 875 alternately rotates in the opposite direction each time it receives a game ball, so that the game ball can be alternately distributed toward one discharge port 873 and the other discharge port 873. can.

As shown in FIG. 57, when the game balls are introduced from the introduction port 872A of the distribution mechanism 871A on the most upstream first stage, the distribution when the 1st to 17th game balls are introduced in that order. think. As shown in FIG. 57, considering that all the third switching valves 875 are tilted to the left in the initial state, odd-numbered game balls are distributed toward the discharge port 873 on the right side in the distribution mechanism 871A of the first stage. , even-numbered game balls are distributed toward the discharge port 873 on the left side.

In the distribution mechanism 871 of the second stage, the 1st, 5th, 9th, 13th and 17th game balls are distributed toward the discharge port 873 on the right side, and the 3rd, 7th, 11th and 15th game balls are distributed.
The second game ball is distributed toward the discharge port 873 on the left side.

In the third stage distribution mechanism 871, the 1st, 9th and 17th game balls are distributed toward the right side discharge port 873, and the 5th and 13th game balls are distributed toward the left side discharge port 873. be done.

In the fourth stage distribution mechanism 871, the 1st and 17th game balls are discharged from the discharge port 87 on the right side.
3, and the ninth game ball is distributed toward the discharge port 873 on the left side. Here, when the 16th game ball is distributed, the third switching valve 875 returns to the initial state, and the 17th game ball is distributed in the same way as the 1st game ball. Therefore, the second distribution unit 870 repeats the operation of distributing the game balls with 16 pieces as one cycle.

Therefore, as shown in the following (1) to (9), the second sorting unit 870 appropriately selects the outlet 873 that communicates with the inlet 40a, so that the game can be played at a ratio of 1/16 to 15/16. A sphere can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 .

(1): When any one of the discharge ports 873D (both of which are terminal ends) of the fourth-stage distribution mechanism 871D is communicated with the inlet 40a, the rate of 1 out of 16, that is, 1/16
The game ball can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a rate of . The remaining outlets 873A, 873B, 873C, and 873D are open to the game area 32 (the area where the game ball does not flow down to the inlet 40a) (the same applies hereinafter).

(2): Both outlets 873D of the fourth-stage sorting mechanism 871D are communicated with the inlet 40a, or the open outlet 873C (terminating) of the third-stage sorting mechanism 871C is connected to the inlet. 40a, the game balls can flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a rate of 2 out of 16, that is, at a rate of 2/16.

(3): When one outlet 873D of the fourth-stage sorting mechanism 871D and the open outlet 873C of the third-stage sorting mechanism 871C are communicated with the inlet 40a, the ratio of 3 out of 16, that is, The game balls can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a rate of 3/16.

(4): Connect the open discharge port 873B (terminating) of the second stage distribution mechanism 871B to the inflow port 40a, or open the discharge ports 873C and 4 of the distribution mechanism 871C in the third stage. When both discharge ports 873D of the distribution mechanism 871D of the stage are communicated with the inflow port 40a, 4 out of 16 game balls, that is, 4/16 of the game balls are delivered to the rotating body unit 8.
00.

(5): When the opened discharge port 873B of the second-stage distribution mechanism 871B and one discharge port 873D of the fourth-stage distribution mechanism 871D are communicated with the inlet 40a, the ratio of 5 out of 16, that is, The game balls can flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a rate of 5/16.

(6): the discharge port 873B at the end of the second-stage sorting mechanism 871B, the open discharge port 873C of the third-stage sorting mechanism 871C, or both the discharge ports 873D of the fourth-stage sorting mechanism 871D, is communicated with the inflow port 40a, the ratio of 6 out of 16, that is, 6/
The game balls can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a rate of 16.

(7): The open discharge port 873B of the second-stage sorting mechanism 871B, the open discharge port 873C of the third-stage sorting mechanism 871C, and one of the discharge ports 873D of the fourth-stage sorting mechanism 871D When communicating with the inflow port 40a, the ratio of 7 out of 16, that is, 7/16
The game ball can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a rate of .

(8): connecting the open discharge port 873A (terminating) of the first-stage sorting mechanism 871A to the inlet 40a, or the open discharge port 873B of the second-stage sorting mechanism 871B; When both the open discharge port 873C of the third stage sorting mechanism 871C and the open discharge port 873D of the fourth stage sorting mechanism 871D are communicated with the inlet 40a, 8 out of 16
The game balls can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a rate of 8/16.

(9): In the above (1) to (7), when the open discharge port 873A of the first stage sorting mechanism 871A is further communicated, game balls are distributed to the rotary unit at a ratio of 9/16 to 15/16, respectively. It can flow down towards 800 .

In the fourth modification, four sorting mechanisms 871 are connected in series. note that,
In the distribution unit 860 of the third modified example, the distribution mechanism (the second switching valve 866) has one stage.

[Probability density distribution of start value S]
FIG. 59 is a graph comparing the probability density distribution of the start value S of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment with the probability density distribution of the start value S of the conventional gaming machine. For example, 100 game balls per minute
In a game machine that shoots 100 game balls, the start value S can be defined as the number of times the special pattern fluctuates (the number of executions of the special pattern variation display game) when 100 game balls are shot, and the game ball wins in the starting prize winning port 36. Synonymous with number of times. Therefore, for example, when game balls are shot continuously and the special symbol changes 6.25 times per minute, the start value S is 6.25 times/minute.

On the other hand, in the conventional game machine, the game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails or windmills planted in the game area 32, and some of the game balls enter the starting prize opening 36. However, the rolling direction of the game ball changes irregularly due to obstructing nails and windmills.

Therefore, in a coordinate system in which the horizontal axis is a random variable (start value S) and the vertical axis is probability density, the start value S has a certain probability density (probability = 1) at the start value S, and other values Instead of the point on the delta function where the probability density is zero, it can be defined as the point on the probability density curve where the value is the center of the random variable and the probability density is the peak value.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59, when the set start value (design value) is set to 6.25 in the conventional game machine, the actually observed start value S is centered at 6.25. It is observed with probability on the probability density distribution curve (A) that has a very wide distribution and a low peak value. In particular, the probability density distribution curve (A) has a certain probability density even when the start value S is 0 or 1, so this becomes a slump (extremely small) of the start value S, and the game ball starts the winning opening 36. It has become difficult to stably win prizes.

Also, in the conventional game machine, even if the set start value is changed, as described above,
Although the position of the horizontal axis of the probability density distribution curve (A) changes, the peak value remains low, so
The game hall (hall) side cannot effectively change the starting value S, and it is difficult for the player to feel the change in the starting value S.

Furthermore, in a conventional gaming machine, even if the probability setting value for setting the probability of occurrence of a big hit can be changed, as described above, the start value S has a slump. is difficult to reflect as a change in the probability of occurrence of a big win, and it is also difficult for a player to feel a change in the set probability value as a change in the probability of occurrence of a big win.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a plurality of game balls held by the rotator unit 800 (rotating stage 810) are periodically flown down toward the start winning opening 36, and the game balls start winning. The mouth 36 is almost guaranteed to win the prize. In addition, the number of game balls equal to or more than the design start value S is supplied to the rotating body unit 800 (rotating stage 810) from the warp passage 40e in one minute.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, for example, the set start value is 6.2
When set to 5, the actually observed start value S becomes a point on the probability density distribution curve (B) with a narrow distribution centered at 6.25 and a high peak value. And the probability density distribution curve (
In B), since the peak value is high, the frequency at which the game ball wins in the start winning hole 36 becomes extremely high near the start value S=6.25. Moreover, the probability density is almost zero when the start value S is 0 or 1, and the slump in the start value S does not substantially occur.

Therefore, the start value S can be set low on the hall side, and even in this case, a slump does not occur and the variation of the special symbols (variation display game) is almost certainly implemented, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can. Moreover, since the degree of reflection of the change in the probability of occurrence of the big hit by the change in the probability set value is high, it is possible to easily adjust the profit.

Further, in the third embodiment, the start value S is stabilized, so the rotor unit 800
Holds the game ball before winning the prize, thereby mechanically suspending the starting prize. Therefore, the start winning that occurs when the game ball enters the start winning opening 36 is electrically suspended (stored).
It is also possible to omit the configuration (starting winning memory, starting memory) or reduce the maximum limit to be reserved.

A case where the set start value=6.25 is realized in the fourth modification or the fifth modification will be described. 100 left-handed game balls are shot per minute and flow down to the game area 32,
Game balls are distributed to the distributing units (first distributing unit 860, second distributing unit 870) with an average probability of 1/2 by the planted obstacle nail, and the distribution unit has a ratio (probability) of 1 in 8. Considering that most of the game balls that flow down to the rotating body stage enter the start prize winning port 36, the start value S is (100 balls/minute) x (1/2) x (1
/8) = 6.25 pieces/minute. Here, in the fourth modification (first sorting unit 860), the set count value is 7 (the count number of the detection signal of the fourth proximity switch 72d is an integer from 0 to 7), and in the fifth modification (second In the distribution unit 870), by adopting the configuration of (2) above, game balls can be caused to flow down to the rotary stage 810 at a rate (probability) of one in eight.

Further, in the third embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotation stage 810 is changed, or the drive timing of the gate valve 820 (valve solenoid 144) is changed (the rotation speed and the drive timing are changed along with the change of the probability set value). can be changed), the set start value can be easily changed. At this time, the probability density distribution curve (B
) will shift in the horizontal direction while maintaining a high peak value. Therefore, changes in the set start value can be reflected as changes in the start value S as they are.

Therefore, for the gaming machine 10 designed with a low start value S=5.2, for example, there is a normal game state between the gaming machine designed with the same ball output rate (base) and a general start value S=5.8. However, it is possible to design to return the difference equivalent to the difference to the player as special prize balls (balls from big hits, etc.) (for example, increase the number of big win rounds). As a result, it is possible to provide a game-oriented gaming machine that is ``sweet'' and ``attractive'' to the player.

It should be noted that the spread of the distribution width of the probability density distribution curve (B) is mainly due to variations in the flow path of the game balls flowing down from the obstructing nail upstream of the distribution unit (first distribution unit 860, second distribution unit 870). , it is considered to be due to variations in the flow path of the game ball that flows down toward the start winning opening 36 without passing through the notch 812 . In addition, in the absence of a sorting unit, it is also caused by variation in the flow path of game balls flowing down toward the inlet 40a from obstructing nails arranged in the game area 32 upstream of the inlet 40a. By giving the probability density distribution curve (B) a certain degree of spread in the distribution width in this way, it is possible not only to achieve a stable starting value S, but also to cause an accidental start-up winning, which enhances the interest of the game. can be improved.

As described above, according to the third embodiment, the player can reliably generate a certain number of fluctuations (variation display game) with a certain amount of investment, and the manufacturer can stabilize the starting value S, can be set low, and the game hall (hall) side can easily adjust the profit by changing the set probability value.

[Action and effect of the third embodiment]
According to the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the game area 32, the winning area (starting winning opening 36, etc.) arranged in the gaming area 32, and the winning of the game ball to the winning area (starting winning opening 36) A stabilizing prize stabilizing means (induction means, rotator unit 800) is provided. For example, the prize stabilizing means (induction means, rotator unit 800) can hold a plurality of game balls that can flow down the game area 32, and directs the held game balls toward the prize area (starting prize opening 36, etc.). A guide means (rotator unit 800) capable of repeatedly performing a guide operation is provided. Alternatively, the prize stabilizing means (guidance means, rotator unit 800) is capable of retaining a plurality of game balls that can flow down the game area 32, and guides the accumulated game balls toward the prize area (starting prize opening 36). Guide means (rotating body unit 800, obstacle nail 830, rebound member 840) that can repeatedly perform the operation of
Prepare. As a result, the game ball can be stably entered into the winning area, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. As a result, the start value S can always be stabilized. In addition, in the conventional game machine, it was not possible to fully enjoy the rolling of the game ball. You can enjoy the situation, and your interest will improve. In particular, this embodiment targets the game ball before winning a prize, and enjoys the state of rolling of the game ball before winning a prize by the prize stabilizing means (guidance means, rotator unit 800) immediately after the start of the game. can be used to improve interest.

In the third embodiment, the prize area is the starting prize port 36 . As a result, the start value S relating to the variation (variation display game) caused by the winning of the start winning slot 36 can be constantly stabilized.

In the third embodiment, the game area 32 includes means for guiding game balls (rotator unit 800).
A distribution unit (first distribution unit 860, second
A sorting unit 870) is arranged. Thereby, the start value S can be further stabilized.

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) has a predetermined period (e.g., 8
It is possible to guide the game balls held in seconds) toward the winning area (starting winning opening 36) one by one.
As a result, it is possible to carry out a pattern variation (variation display game) at regular time intervals.

In the third embodiment, the duration (fluctuation time) of the variable display game started by winning a game ball into the winning area (starting winning port 36, etc.) is substantially the same as the cycle. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to both the variable display game and the guiding means (rotating body unit 800), thereby avoiding a state in which the player gazes only at the guiding means (rotating body unit 800).

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) stops operating while the customer is waiting. As a result, power consumption during waiting for customers can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) operates in a first firing mode (left-handed hitting) in which the game ball can flow down to the guiding means (rotating body unit 800), ), the motion is stopped in a second firing mode (right shot). As a result, the power consumption of the guiding means (rotating stage 810) during the second firing mode (right-handed hitting) is avoided, and the game ball held by the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) when the number of holdings is the maximum. can be avoided from entering the winning area (starting winning opening 36) in vain.

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) includes a rotating stage 810 on which game balls supplied from the game area 32 roll, and a rotating stage 810 arranged to surround the rotating stage 810 and flow down from the rotating stage 810. Tray part 8 that makes the game ball flow down to the game area 32
01, and a plurality of holding portions (cutout portions 812) for holding game balls are arranged in the circumferential direction on the periphery of the rotating stage 810, and the rotating stage 810 rotates on the tray portion 801. to sequentially communicate with the holding portion (notch portion 812), and the holding portion (notch portion 812
), a guide groove 807 capable of guiding the game ball held in the winning area (starting prize opening 36), and a first valve (gate valve 820) that repeatedly closes and opens the entrance of the guide groove 807
) and are placed. As a result, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) can be realized with a simple configuration.
can be constructed.

In the third embodiment, the first valve (gate valve 820) opens the guide groove 807 when the guide groove 807 faces the holding portion (notch portion 812). Thereby, the game ball held in the holding portion (notch portion 812) can be reliably flowed down to the guide groove 807. - 特許庁

In the third embodiment, the holding portion (cutout portion 812) has a cutout shape that opens to the upper surface and the side surface of the rotation stage 810. 812) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the holding portion (notch portion 812) can be configured with a simple configuration, and the holding portion (notch portion 81) can be
2) is exposed from the rolling surface 811 of the rotating stage 810 . Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 comes into contact with the game ball held in the notch 812, the rolling direction of the game ball can be changed. In addition, since the depth of the notch portion 812 (holding portion) is deeper than the radius of the game ball, the game ball held in the notch portion 812 (holding portion) collides with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 811. By doing so, the notch portion 81
2 (holding portion) can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, the rotary stage 810 and tray section 801 are inclined downward toward the game area 32 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the guide means (rotator unit 800) can be reliably flowed down to the game area 32. - 特許庁

In the third embodiment, an extension part 806 extending from the end of the tray part 801 on the side of the game area 32 in a plan view toward the winning area (starting winning opening 36) is provided, and the guide groove 807 is an extending part. 80
6, and the first valve (gate valve 820) has a distance to the root portion of the extension portion 806 (the edge of the tray portion 801 on the side of the game area 32) is larger than the radius of the game ball. is arranged to be shorter, and is arranged so as to be higher than the rolling surface 802 of the game ball of the tray part 801 when closed (so that it intersects the same plane formed by the rolling surface 802), and when opened, the guide groove 8
07 is arranged so as to be lower than the height of the bottom surface. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency in which game balls rolling in the direction directly toward the guide groove 807 enter the guide groove 807 in the tray portion 801 .

In the third embodiment, the distance in the height direction between the tip of the extending portion 806 and the winning area (starting winning opening 36) is longer than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down from the tip of the extension part 806 toward the winning area (starting winning opening 36) collides with the game ball flowing down without passing through the extension part 806, thereby inhibiting winning. Alternatively, there is a possibility that the game ball that has flowed down without passing through the extension part 806 will enter the winning area (starting winning opening 36). Therefore, the frequency of winning of the game ball to the winning area (starting winning opening 36), that is, the start value S can be varied to some extent.

In the third embodiment, the first valve (gate valve 820) is closed by rotating stage 810
are arranged so as to intersect the same plane formed by the upper surfaces of the As a result, the rotary stage 8
It is possible to reduce the frequency in which the game ball rolling from 10 without passing through the holding portion (notch portion 812) enters directly into the guide groove 807.

In the third embodiment, the rotating stage 810 reversely rotates at a predetermined timing. This makes it possible to avoid ball engagement in the rotating stage 810 . In addition, it is also possible to suggest a specific game state (latency probability variation, etc.) by the action.

In the third embodiment, the rotary stage 810 is arranged to intersect the same plane formed by the tray portion 801, and the step between the rotary stage 810 and the same plane is smaller than the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball rides on the rotating stage 810 over the step, so that the rolling direction when riding on the rotating stage 810 can be changed irregularly. Also, it is possible to delay the timing at which game balls flow down to the rotating stage 810 by making it easier for the game balls to accumulate in front of the rotating stage 810 .

In the third embodiment, a rolling direction changing member (obstacle nail 830) capable of changing the rolling direction of the game ball is arranged in a region other than the region where the holding portion of the rotary stage 810 is formed. As a result, the game ball is temporarily retained on the rotating stage 810, and the rolling direction of the game ball during rolling on the rotating stage 810 can be changed irregularly.

In the third embodiment, a bouncing member 840 (slingshot, flipper) for bouncing a game ball rolling on the tray portion 801 toward the rotating stage 810 is arranged on the game area 32 side of the tray portion 801 . As a result, the game ball ejected from the rotating stage 810 can be returned to the rotating stage 810 again, and the game ball is temporarily placed in the tray portion 801.
Alternatively, by staying on the rotating stage 810, it is possible to increase the expectation that the game ball will be held by the holding portion (notch portion 812).

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotator unit 800) takes in the game balls flowing down the game area 32 and supplies them to the rotation stage 810.
0e), first detection means (third proximity switch 72c) for detecting a game ball that has flowed down into the first intake channel (warp passage 40e), and branching from the middle of the first intake channel (warp passage 40e). It is arranged at a branch position of the first branch channel 851 communicating with the game area 32 and the first branch channel 851 of the first intake channel (warp channel 40e), and the first intake channel (warp channel 40e) a second valve (first switching valve 853) that can switch the flow path of the game ball that has flowed down to the flow path that flows down to the rotation stage 810 and the flow path that flows down to the first branch flow path 851; The second valve (first switching valve 853) operates based on the number of times the game ball is detected by the first detection means (third proximity switch 72c). As a result, it is possible to adjust so that the number of game balls flowing down to the rotating stage 810 does not increase excessively.

In the third embodiment, the sorting unit (first sorting unit 860) has an introduction port 862 into which game balls are introduced, and directs the game balls introduced into the introduction port 862 toward the guide means (rotator unit 800). A second intake channel 864 that flows down, a second branch channel 865 that branches from the middle of the second intake channel 864 and communicates with the game area 32, and a second branch channel 865 of the second intake channel 864 is arranged at the branch position of the second intake channel 864
A third valve (third 2 switching valve 866) and a second detection means (fourth proximity switch 72d) for detecting the game ball that has flowed down to the second intake channel 864, and the third valve (second switching valve 866) is It operates based on the number of game balls detected by the second detection means (fourth proximity switch 72d). As a result, the distribution unit (first distribution unit 860) can be constructed with a simple configuration.

In the third embodiment, the distribution unit (second distribution unit 870) includes an inlet 872 through which game balls are introduced, two outlets 873 through which game balls are discharged, and an inlet 872
A third branched flow path (Y-shaped flow path 874) that communicates with and branches from the middle and communicates with two discharge ports 873, and a third branched flow path (Y-shaped flow path 874). A third switching valve 87 for alternately flowing down game balls toward two discharge ports 873 by performing a switching operation each time the ball is received.
5 and a plurality of sorting mechanisms 871 . The sorting mechanisms 871 are connected in series in such a manner that one outlet 873 of the sorting mechanism 871 at the front stage communicates with the introduction port 872 of the sorting mechanism 871 at the rear stage. At least one of the discharge ports 873 that terminate in the distributing mechanism 871C and the distributing mechanism 871D) communicates with the guide means (rotator unit 800). As a result, a distribution unit (second distribution unit 870) for mechanically distributing game balls can be constructed with a simple configuration.

In the third embodiment, the third detecting means (second proximity switch 72b) for detecting passing through a specific position different from the winning area in the game area 32, and the third detecting means (second proximity switch 72b) A lighting display means (upper effect unit 40c, display device 41) that performs lighting display based on the detection of the game ball is provided. As a result, the guide means (rotator unit 800
) holding portion (notch portion 812) holds the game ball, it is possible to reduce the stop hitting of the game ball.

[Fourth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

[Game control device]
FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 60, unlike FIG. 3 of the first embodiment, in the game control device 100 (main board, main board), the output ports 134 to 137 are not present, the electric circuit is simplified, and the number of wires (the number of signals )
is reduced, and a sufficient space (location) for arranging electronic components and the like can be secured. This consists of the gaming microcomputer 111 (CPU 111a) and drivers 138a-138d, as described below.
, 150 and the relay board 70 are performed by serial communication instead of conventional parallel communication. In addition, between the game microcomputer 111 and the production control device 300, between the game microcomputer 111 and the payout control device 200, and between the game microcomputer 111 and the inspection device 500, serial communication is performed in the first embodiment. It doesn't change.

Data from the serial port 173a (first serial port) of the gaming microcomputer 111 is sent to the driver 138a by serial communication (serial method) via the serial signal line 174a.
-138d, sent to the driver 150; Serial port 17 of gaming microcomputer 111
Data from 3b (second serial port) is transmitted to relay board 70 by serial communication (serial method) via serial signal line 174b. In addition, in FIG. 3 of the first embodiment, data is transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 through the data bus 140 by parallel communication (parallel system). In this embodiment, the serial communication is synchronous serial communication and is performed by, for example, SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface), but it is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, the drivers 138c and 138d are each part of one driver IC chip 156 (integrated circuit chip, electronic component). Drivers 138b, 15
0 are each part of one driver IC chip 157 (integrated circuit chip, electronic component). Each driver may be provided as one IC chip.

The game control device 100 (main board) has a connector section 160 (CN1) for connecting with a relay board 70 that supplies a test-fire test signal to the test-fire test device, and the relay board 70
It has a connector part 162 (CN2) for connecting with the game control device 100 (main board).
The connector portion 160 and the connector portion 162 are insertion ports for electric wires such as cables (or harnesses), and are electrically connected to each other by cables or the like. As with the buffer 133,
The connector part 160 (CN1) is also a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in the game parlor.

[Circuit diagram of game control device]
61A, 61B, and 62 are circuit diagrams illustrating a part of an electric circuit (electronic circuit) provided in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) according to the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that the positions of electronic components (such as IC chips), elements and terminals in the circuit diagram may be irrelevant to the positions where they are actually arranged on the substrate. Note that the terminals may be pins, for example. In this embodiment, the board means a circuit board such as a printed board.

The serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a terminal A1 for a serial data signal (TXA), a terminal A2 for a serial clock signal (CKA), a chip select signal (SA
0) includes terminal A3 for (slave select signal) (see FIG. 61). A wiring connected to the terminal A1 is a data line 194 (194a, 194a, 194a) for transmitting a serial data signal (TXA).
94b), the wiring connected to the terminal A2 is the clock line 195 (195a, 195b) for transmitting the serial clock signal (CKA), and the wiring connected to the terminals A3, A4 is the chip select signal (SA0, SA1). ) for transmitting the chip select line 196
(196a, 196b). Since only serial data is output from the gaming microcomputer 111 (master) through serial communication, the terminal A1 is for outputting serial data, and the terminal for inputting serial data from the slave is omitted. . A chip select signal is a signal for selecting a slave (IC chip) capable of input operation or output operation.

Serial signal line 174a (see FIG. 6) from serial port 173a of game microcomputer 111
0) comprises at least a data line 194 (signal line) for transmitting a serial data signal (TXA) and a clock line 195 (signal line) for transmitting a serial clock signal (CKA).

The serial port 173b of the game microcomputer 111 has a terminal B1 for serial data signal (TXB), a terminal B2 for serial clock signal (CKB), a chip select signal (SB
0) includes terminal B3 for (slave select signal) (see FIG. 62). A wiring connected to the terminal B1 serves as a data line 211 for transmitting a serial data signal (TXB).
2 is a clock line 21 for transmitting a serial clock signal (CKB).
2, and the wiring connected to the terminal B3 becomes the chip select line 218 for transmitting the chip select signal (SB0).

Since only serial data is output from the game microcomputer 111 (master) by serial communication, the terminal B1 is for serial data output, and the serial data input terminal from the slave is omitted. . Also, if the serial port 173b performs serial communication with only one IC chip (slave), the chip select signal and its chip select line 218 can be omitted.

Serial signal line 174b (see FIG. 6) from serial port 173b of game microcomputer 111
0) comprises at least a data line 211 (signal line) for transmitting a serial data signal (TXB) and a clock line 212 (signal line) for transmitting a serial clock signal (CKB).

[Circuit diagram related to serial communication between gaming microcomputer and driver]
FIG. 61A is a circuit diagram relating to serial communication between the game microcomputer 111 and each driver in the game control device 100, and an electric circuit (electronic circuit) around the game microcomputer 111 and each driver IC chip. is a circuit diagram illustrating 61A shows the status of transmission of the external information signal from the serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111, the LED drive signal of the collective display device 50, the LED drive signal to the performance display device 152, and the like. The LED drive signals are the signals to the digit lines and segment lines of the batch display 50 or performance display 152 .

The driver IC chips 156 and 157 are 16-bit serial/parallel conversion circuits for converting serial data signals (TXA) from the serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111 into parallel data signals. The driver IC chips 156 and 157 may be general ones having shift registers and parallel data latch circuits (data registers). A shift register is composed of, for example, a plurality of D-type flip-flops, and bit data of one D-type flip-flop moves to an adjacent D-type flip-flop in synchronization with a serial clock signal (CKA). The parallel data latch circuit is composed of, for example, a plurality of D-type flip-flops, and latches (holds) and takes in (sets) 16-bit data in the shift register at a predetermined latch timing for receiving a latch signal.

The driver IC chips 156 and 157 are cascaded (connected in multiple stages), with the driver IC chip 156 constituting the first stage and the driver IC chip 157 constituting the second stage. A serial data signal (TXA) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data line 194a
is input to the input terminal DIN of the driver IC chip 156, and the driver IC chip 15
6 shift registers and output from the output terminal DOUT. Driver I
A serial data signal (TXA) output from the output terminal DOUT of the C chip 156 is input to the input terminal DIN of the driver IC chip 157 and passes through the shift register of the driver IC chip 157 .

The driver IC chips 156 and 157 receive the same serial clock signal (CKA) from the clock line 195a and the same chip select signal (SA) from the chip select line 196a.
0), and the same reset signal (RESET) from the reset line 197a is input in parallel to the respective input terminals SCK, /CS, and /RESET. "/" indicates a negative logic terminal. The shift registers of the driver IC chips 156 and 157 operate synchronously with the same serial clock signal (CKA). Driver IC chips 156, 15
7 parallel data latch circuit receives the same chip select signal (SA0) as a latch signal.
is received (latch timing), the data in the shift register is captured. The data captured in the parallel data latch circuits of the driver IC chips 156 and 157 are output as 16-bit parallel data to the parallel output terminals (PA0-PA7, PB0-P
B7) are output at the same time. Therefore, the two driver IC chips 156 and 157 are
Together, it becomes a serial-parallel conversion circuit with a total of 32 bits, and the serial data signal (TX
A) is converted into 32-bit parallel data. The driver IC chips 156 and 157 are simultaneously reset (initialized) by the reset signal from the Schmitt buffer 125, and the internal data is cleared.

Among the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 156, terminals PA0-PA7, PB0-
PB2 is connected to terminals S17-S7 of connector section 181 (CN3), respectively. The terminals S17-S7 of the connector section 181 (CN3) are connected to the external information terminal 71 by electric wires such as cables. Therefore, the parallel output terminals PA0-PA of the driver IC chip 156
7 and PB0-PB2 are transmitted to an external information terminal 71 as external information AK (external information signals). Thus, the shift register, parallel data latch circuit, and parallel output terminals PA0-PA7, PB0-PB2 of the driver IC chip 156 constitute the driver 138d (FIG. 60). A terminal PB3 of the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 156 supplies a door signal indicating opening of the glass frame 15 or the like.

For example, the external information A to K are, respectively, a call signal, an out signal, a security signal, a main prize ball signal, a big win 4 signal, a big win 3 signal, a big win 2 signal, a big win 1 signal, a starting opening signal,
These are the number of pattern determination signal and the door/frame open signal. The call signal is a signal for calling the staff of the game hall (hall), and the out signal is a signal based on the detection of the out ball detection switch 74 . The security signal is a signal that is transmitted when there is fraud or an error, such as magnet fraud or radio fraud. The main prize ball signal is a signal that is generated each time the number of prize balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10).

The jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, and jackpot 4 signal may be signals defined by the model as jackpot information, and may be turned on at the start of the jackpot and turned off at the end of the jackpot or the end of the time saving. signal. The starting port signal is the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2
It is a prize winning signal of the starting port based on the detection of the switch 37a, the pattern confirmation number signal is a signal indicating the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game (the number of symbol confirmation), and the door/frame opening signal is the glass frame opening. It is a signal indicating the opening of the glass frame 15 or the front frame (game frame) 12 by the detection switch 63 or the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch).

In addition, the security signal, the main ball signal, the start signal, the door/frame opening signal, and the number of pattern determination signal may be set in the external information editing process (A1319) of the timer interrupt process.

Terminals PB4 to PB7 of the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 156 are connected to terminals L9 to L12 of the connector section 185 (CN4) via the gate driver 183, respectively. The connector part 185 (CN4) is connected to the collective display device 50 by an electric wire such as a cable.
connect to. The parallel output terminals PB4-PB7 are connected to the LED lamps (D
1-D18) are electrically connected to the digit lines (LED digits 0-3) to which the cathode terminals are connected. Thus, the shift register, parallel data latch circuit, and parallel output terminals PB4 to PB7 of the driver IC chip 156 are connected to the driver 138c.
(Fig. 60).

The first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (lamp D1) and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 of the collective display device 50
Since (lamp D1) is a 7-segment type (87-segment type if dots Dp are included) display, the batch display device 50 can be controlled as a 4-digit by 8-segment LED display. In this case, the digit lines (LED digits 0-3) will select the digits.

The gate driver 183 is used for signal amplification and the like, and is connected to the terminals PB4 to PB7.
The wiring from is branched in two directions. A pull-up resistor R1 is connected to the wiring from the terminals PB4 to PB7. The input terminals I3 and I7 of the gate driver 183 are connected to the wiring from the terminal PB4 of the driver IC chip 156, and the input terminals I2 and I5 are connected to the wiring from the terminal PB5 of the driver IC chip 156. I1 and I8 are connected to wiring from terminal PB6 of driver IC chip 156, and input terminals I4 and I6 are connected to wiring from terminal PB7 of driver IC chip 156. FIG. Signals at input terminals I1-I7 are amplified and output from output terminals O1-O7. The output terminals O5-O7 related to the digit line are connected to the terminals L9-L12 of the connector section 185 (CN4), while the output terminals O1-O4 related to the digit line are of a 4-digit 7-segment type (including dot Dp). It connects to the digit lines (digits 0-3) of the performance display device 152, which is an 8-segment LED display. By sharing the terminals PB4-PB7 with the digit lines (digits 0-3) of the performance display device 152 and the digit lines (LED digits 0-3) of the collective display device 50, the cost can be reduced.

Terminals PA0-PA7 of the parallel output terminals of driver IC chip 157 are connected to terminals L1-L8 of connector section 185 (CN4) through resistors R2, respectively. The connector part 185 (CN4) is connected to the collective display device 50 by an electric wire such as a cable. The parallel output terminals PA0-PA7 are electrically connected to the segment lines (LED segments 0-7) to which the anode terminals of the LED lamps of the collective display device 50 are connected. Thus, the shift register, parallel data latch circuit, and parallel output terminals PA0-PA7 of the driver IC chip 157 constitute the driver 138b (FIG. 60).

A current is supplied to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line (LED segments 0-7) of the collective display device 50, and the current is extracted through the digit line (LED digits 0-3) from the cathode terminal that outputs the ground potential. Then, a current flows through the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method (dynamic lighting method) to light them.

Terminals PB0 to PB7 among the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 157 are
They are electrically connected to the segment lines (ag, Dp) of the performance display device 152, which is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) LED display. Thus, the shift register, parallel data latch circuit, and parallel output terminals PB0 to PB7 of the driver IC chip 157 constitute the driver 150 (FIG. 60).

A current is supplied to the anode terminal of the LED via the segment lines (ag, Dp) of the performance display device 152, and the current is extracted via the digit line (digits 0-3) from the cathode terminal that outputs the ground potential. , a current flows through the LEDs that are sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method to light them. In this way, the performance display device 152 can display the probability setting value, the ratio of the role, the ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls as the performance display.

As described above, the external information signal, the LED drive signal of the batch display device 50 (the signal to the digit line and the segment line), the LED drive signal of the performance display device 152 (the signal to the digit line and the segment line) are By the microcomputer 111, it is included in the serial data signal (TXA) synthesized in the output processing (A1306) and transmitted, and the driver IC chips 156 and 157
are output as parallel data signals.

FIG. 61B is a circuit diagram related to serial communication between the game microcomputer 111 and the solenoid driver 138a in the game control device 100, and also shows an electric circuit (electronic circuit).
The transmission status of the solenoid drive signal from the serial port 173a of the game microcomputer 111 is shown.

IC chips 138a-1 and 138a-2 for solenoid drivers are drivers (driving circuits) 138a (see FIG. 60) that generate and output solenoid drive signals as parallel data signals.
). The IC chip 138a-1 is a general 8-bit serial/parallel conversion circuit having a shift register and a parallel data latch circuit (data register). I
The C chip 138a-2 is connected to the IC by a Darlington connection that directly connects a plurality of transistors.
A Darlington current amplifier that amplifies the current signal from chip 138a-1.

A serial data signal (
TXA) is input to the input terminal SI of the IC chip 138a-1, and the IC chip 138a-1
pass through the shift register. Input terminal SCK and input terminal /G of IC chip 138a-1
, an input terminal /SCLR receives a serial clock signal (CKA), a gate signal (GATE) as an enable signal, and a reset signal from the Schmitt buffer 125 via a clock line 195b, an enable signal line 198b (198), and a reset line. 197b. The data line 194b may be branched from the data line 194a (FIG. 61A), and the clock line 195b may be branched from the clock line 195a (FIG. 61A).

The shift register of the IC chip 138a-1 operates with a serial clock signal (CKA). The parallel data latch circuit of the IC chip 138a-1 takes in the data of the shift register according to the chip select signal (SA1) input to the input terminal RCK. The chip select signal (SA1) here functions as a latch signal. IC chip 138
The data fetched into the parallel data latch circuit a-1 is output to the parallel output terminals (QA-Q) as an 8-bit parallel data signal when the gate signal (GATE) is input.
H). A gate signal (GATE) functions as an enable signal that enables the output of the IC chip 138a-1. When the gate signal (GATE) is input to an output circuit such as a three-state buffer, the parallel data signal is output from the parallel output terminals (QA-QH) through the output circuit that is enabled for output operation. Also, the IC chip 138a-1 is reset by a reset signal, and internal data is cleared.

Of the parallel data signals generated from the serial data signal (TXA) by the IC chip 138a-1, the signal from the parallel output terminal QE is used as a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball by the ball launcher, and is used for payout control. Output is directed to the device 200 . Signals from the parallel output terminals QA-QC are output as a grand winning opening solenoid drive signal, a lever solenoid drive signal, and a general electric solenoid drive signal, respectively. In other words, the grand prize winning opening solenoid drive signal, the lever solenoid drive signal, and the general electric solenoid drive signal are transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 in a serial data signal (TXA), and the IC chip 138
a-1 is output as a parallel data signal. Even if the number of solenoids differs depending on the model of the gaming machine 10, the drive signal for the solenoids is sent to the gaming microcomputer 111 (CPU 11).
1a), the wiring required for parallel communication can be reduced, and the game control device 100 (game control means) can be easily shared between different models.

Here, the large winning opening solenoid drive signal is a signal for driving the large winning opening solenoid 39b that opens the special variable winning device 39, and the lever solenoid driving signal drives the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86. The general electric solenoid drive signal is a signal for driving the general electric solenoid 37c that opens the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. FIG.

The IC chip 138a-2 amplifies the big winning opening solenoid drive signal, the lever solenoid drive signal, and the general electric solenoid drive signal from the parallel output terminals QA-QC of the IC chip 138a-1. The driving signals from the parallel output terminals QA-QC of the IC chip 138a-1 are
They are input to the input terminals J1-J3 of the IC chip 138a-2 through the resistors R4 and output from the output terminals K1-K3 after amplification. The large winning opening solenoid drive signal, the lever solenoid driving signal, and the general electric solenoid driving signal from the output terminals K1-K3 are not only sent to the large winning opening solenoid 39b, the lever solenoid 86b, and the general electric solenoid 37c, respectively.
It is also transmitted to the relay board 70 (FIG. 60).

[Circuit diagram related to serial communication between game microcomputer and relay board]
FIG. 62 illustrates a circuit diagram relating to serial communication between the game microcomputer 111 and the relay board 70 in the game control device 100 (main board).
60 (CN1) is a circuit diagram illustrating an electric circuit (electronic circuit) around 60 (CN1).

As serial signals output from terminals B1-B3 of the serial port 173b of the game microcomputer 111, a serial data signal (TXB), a serial clock signal (CKB) and a chip select signal (SB0) are connected to the connector section 160 (CN1 ) terminal D7 (signal terminal) for serial data signal (TXB) and terminal D6 for serial clock signal (CKB)
(signal terminal) and the terminal D3 (chip select terminal) for the chip select signal (SB0) via the buffer 133 . When the serial port 173b performs serial communication with only one IC chip (slave), the chip select signal and the chip select line 218 through which the chip select signal is transmitted may be omitted.

The serial data signal (TXB) includes a test-firing test signal transmitted to relay board 70 electrically connected to connector section 160 (CN1). Unlike the conventional parallel data signal, the test-firing test signal relating to the gaming machine 10 is transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the relay board 70 as a serial data signal (TXB). The test-firing test signal is a signal in which information necessary for a test-firing test, such as ON/OFF information of various switches in FIG. Therefore, even if the number of switches differs for each model of the game machine 10, wiring for each switch that was required in the case of parallel communication can be reduced, and the game control device 100 (game control means) can be shared between different models. become easier to convert.

The serial data signal (TXB) is converted to a parallel data signal in the relay board 70 and then output to the test-firing test apparatus that conducts the test-firing test. Therefore, the relay board 70 can be easily shared between different models simply by preparing wiring necessary for serial communication in the relay board 70 (relay means) in advance.

The above various switches include a gate switch 34a, a starting port 1 switch 36a, a starting port 2 switch 37a, a prize winning port switch 35a, a big winning port switch 39a, a specific area switch 72, a remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the like. Note that the solenoid drive signal as the test firing test signal is transmitted from the driver 138a to the relay board 70 through another route as described above.

In the timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program, part of the game control program) of FIG.
U111a) is input and taken in (input processing (A1303), prize winning opening switch/state monitoring processing (A1310)), and then transmitted as a test firing test signal of serial data (
Output processing (A1306)).

In addition, as a test firing test signal transmitted in the output process (A1306) of the timer interrupt process (interrupt process program), the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number (A3403, A35
03 set), signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (set with A3205, A3210), signal about the end of fluctuation of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (set with A2609), special figure 1 and special figure 2 Signals related to the start of the jackpot (set by A2610), signals related to right-handed or left-handed commands (on/off of the firing position designation signal 1) (set by A2610, A2614, etc.), signals related to the opening start and end of the big winning opening (ON/OFF of signal during operation of special electric accessory 1) (A2611
, A2613).

Furthermore, as the test firing test signal to be transmitted and processed in the output process (A1306), a signal related to the start and end of the normal figure fluctuation display game, a signal related to the normal electric operation start and normal electric operation end (normal electric accessory 1 in operation signal ON/OFF), signals related to the start and end of the high probability state (on/off of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, ON/OFF of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal), signals related to the start and end of the time reduction (special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal ON/OFF, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON/OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON/OFF, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON/OFF), game machine error state signal, and the like.

A test-firing test signal relating to the gaming machine 10 is transmitted to the relay board 70 via the connector section 160 (CN1) as a serial data signal (TXB).

The gaming microcomputer 111 also has a terminal OE to which an enable line 214 (enable wiring) that enables operation of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 192 (predetermined circuit) provided on the relay board 70 is connected. The enable signal (O
E) is a terminal D2 (enable terminal) for an enable signal of the connector section 160 (CN1)
, through the buffer 133 . A wiring through which an enable signal is transmitted is an enable line 214 . A pull-up resistor R is connected to the enable line 214 before connecting to the buffer 133 .

Further, the reset signal (RESET) from the Schmidt buffer 125 is transmitted through the buffer 133 to the reset signal terminal D10 (reset terminal) of the connector section 160 (CN1). Note that a wiring through which a reset signal is transmitted is referred to as a reset line 216 (reset wiring).

In addition, the connector section 160 (CN1) includes ground terminals D1 and D1 for grounding.
It has D4, D5, D8, D9, and power terminals D11, D12 to which a voltage of 5V is supplied.

The buffer 133 is a three-state buffer, and the input to the /1G terminal is L level (
GND), the logic value (L or H) of the input to the input terminals 1A1-1A4 is directly output from the output terminals 1Y1-1Y4, and when the input to the /1G terminal is H level, the input terminal 1A1-1A4 and output terminals 1Y1-1Y4 are in a high impedance state and electrically separated. When the input to the /2G terminal is L level (GND), the buffer 133 outputs the logical value (L or H) of the input to the input terminals 2A1-2A4 as it is to the output terminal 2Y.
1-2Y4, and when the input to the /2G terminal is at H level, the input terminal 2A1-
2A4 and the output terminals 2Y1-2Y4 are in a high impedance state and electrically separated. "/" indicates a negative logic terminal.

The buffer 133 corrects and outputs the voltage of the logical value (L level or H level) and is provided as an option. 133 becomes unnecessary.

In FIG. 62, since the input to the /1G terminal and /2G terminal is L level (GND), the signals input to the input terminals 1A1-1A4 and 2A1-2A4 are respectively output terminals 1Y1-1Y4.
, 2Y1-2Y4. Therefore, the reset signal (RESET), the serial data signal (TXB), the serial clock signal (CKB), the chip select signal (SB0), and the enable signal (OE) are connected to the input terminals 1A1, 1A3, 1A2, 1 of the buffer 133, respectively.
Input to A4 and 2A1, and output from output terminals 1Y1, 1Y3, 1Y2, 1Y4, and 2Y1 toward connector section 160 (CN1). Output terminal 1Y for reset signal (RESET)
1, output terminal 1Y3 for serial data signal (TXB), serial clock signal (CKB
), the output terminal 1Y4 for the chip select signal (SB0), and the output terminal 2Y1 for the enable signal (OE) are connected to the terminal D1 of the connector section 160 (CN1).
0, terminal D7, terminal D6, terminal D3, and terminal D2 by wiring.

[Wiring example 1]
FIG. 63 shows a wiring example (
FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining wiring example 1) based on positions (physical layout) where wiring is actually arranged;

In this embodiment, the substrate (main substrate) of the game control device 100 is a general double-sided printed substrate (double-sided substrate). In this embodiment, circuit components (electronic components such as ICs and connectors) are arranged on the upper surface of the substrate. Note that the circuit components may be arranged on both sides or the bottom surface of the substrate. In the printed board (double-sided board) as the main board, the data line 211 and the clock line 21
2. The wiring such as the enable line 214, the reset line 216, the chip select line 218, and the terminals to which these are connected are arranged on the top surface (front side, upper layer) or the bottom surface (back side, lower layer) (
bottom side is fine). The substrate (main substrate) of the game control device 100 may be a general multi-layer printed substrate (multi-layer substrate). In this case, on the printed circuit board as the main board, wiring such as the data line 211, the clock line 212, the enable line 214, the reset line 216, the chip select line 218, etc. and the terminals to which these are connected are arranged on the outer layer (top layer, surface layer). ), and the inner two layers (inner layers) serve as a power supply layer and a ground layer (ground layer, GND layer).

The terminal to which the terminal of the connector section 160 (CN1) is connected by wiring is the buffer 1
33 is provided, it becomes the terminal of the buffer 133, but when the buffer 133 is not provided, it becomes the terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111.

When the buffer 133 is provided, the data line 211 from the terminal D7, the clock line 212 from the terminal D6, the enable line 214 from the terminal D2, the reset line 216 from the terminal D10, and the chip select line 218 from the terminal D3 are , an output terminal 1Y3 for the serial data signal (TXB) of the buffer 133, an output terminal 1Y2 for the serial clock signal (CKB), an output terminal 2Y1 for the enable signal (OE), and an output terminal for the reset signal (RESET). 1Y1 is connected to an output terminal 1Y4 for a chip select signal (SB0).

If the buffer 133 is not provided, the data line 211 from the terminal D7, the clock line 212 from the terminal D6, the enable line 214 from the terminal D2, and the chip select line 218 from the terminal D3 are connected to the game microcomputer 111. are connected to a terminal B1 for a serial data signal (TXB), a terminal B2 for a serial clock signal (CKB), a terminal OE for an enable signal (OE), and a terminal B3 for a chip select signal (SB0). The reset line 216 from the terminal D10 is a reset signal (RESET) at a location other than the gaming microcomputer 111.
The position of the terminal RESET may be different from that shown in FIG.

As described above, the connector section 160 (CN1) includes a plurality of signal terminals D6 and D7 to which the clock line 212 (signal line) and the data line 211 (signal line) are respectively connected, and the enable line 214
and a reset terminal D10 to which the reset line 216 is connected.
And prepare.

Further, the connector section 160 (CN1) is connected to the signal terminal D6 compared to the enable terminal D2.
, and D7. The ground terminals D4 and D5 can widen the distance between the enable terminal D2 and the signal terminals D6 and D7, and the ground terminals D4 and D5 can shield the signal terminals D6 and D7. can prevent or suppress interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between

Also, the ground terminal D4 is closer to the signal terminal D6 (clock terminal) than the chip select terminal D3. Ground terminal D5 is closer to both signal terminals D6 and D7 than chip select terminal D3. Chip select terminal D3 and signal terminals D6 and D7 are connected by ground terminals D4 and D5.
and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be shielded by the ground terminals D4 and D5. can be suppressed.

Further, the connector section 160 (CN1) is connected to the signal terminal D6 compared to the reset terminal D10.
, and D7. The connector part 160 (CN1) is
A ground terminal D9 is provided at a position closer to the signal terminal D7 (data terminal) than the reset terminal D10. The reset terminal D10 and the signal terminals D6, D are grounded by the ground terminals D8, D9.
7 and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be shielded by the ground terminals D8 and D9. can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the connector portion 1 on the upper surface of the printed board (double-sided board)
Ground terminals D1, D4, D5, D8, and D9 of 60 (CN1) are grounded by being connected to a ground line (not shown) present on the lower surface (back side, lower layer) via through holes, through vias, or the like. The power terminals D11 and D12 on the upper surface are connected to power lines (not shown) present on the lower surface (back side, lower layer) by through holes, through vias, or the like. A ground wire (not shown) to which these ground terminals are connected and a power wire (not shown) to which a power terminal is connected may exist on the upper surface (front side, upper layer). Moreover, when the main board is a multi-layer board, the connector part 160 (CN1)
The ground terminals D1, D4, D5, D8, and D9 of are connected to a ground layer (ground layer, GND layer) inside the main substrate (printed circuit board) by through holes, through vias, or the like. Also, the power terminals D11 and D12 are connected to the power layer inside the main substrate (printed circuit board) by through holes, through vias, or the like.

In this embodiment, in the board (main board) of the game control device 100, interference with other wiring (
In order to reduce crosstalk, crosstalk, influence), the data line 211 and the clock line 212 through which a pulse signal (high-speed serial signal) is frequently transmitted with a high communication frequency are arranged together. There is no other wiring between (plurality of signal lines). The other wiring here is an enable line 214, a reset line 216, a chip select line 218, etc., to which pulse signals are not frequently transmitted. Note that the minimum spacing W1 (MIN) between the data line 211 and the clock line 212, that is, the minimum spacing between a plurality of signal lines, can prevent interference (crosstalk) between the data line 211 and the clock line 212. The spacing is the minimum spacing that can prevent interference in order to make the wiring dense.

In the substrate (main substrate) of the game control device 100, the interval W2 between the enable line 214 and the signal line (here, the clock line 212) near the enable line 214 is the data line 21
is wider than the minimum spacing W1(MIN) between 1 and clock line 212. Also, the reset line 21
6 and the signal line (data line 211 in this case) closer to the reset line 216 is wider than the minimum spacing W1 (MIN). Furthermore, the interval W4 between the chip select line 218 and the signal line (here, the data line 211) closer to the chip select line 218 is wider than the minimum interval W1 (MIN).

Since the interval W2 is larger than the interval W1 (MIN) at which interference can be prevented (W2>W1
(MIN)), interference between the enable line 214 and the signal line (clock line 212) can be prevented. Since the interval W3 is larger than the interval W1 (MIN) at which interference can be prevented (W3>W
1 (MIN)), interference between the reset line 216 and the signal line (data line 211) can be prevented. Since the interval W4 is larger than the interval W1 (MIN) at which interference can be prevented (W4>W1
(MIN)), interference between the chip select line 218 and the signal line (data line 211) can be prevented. In particular, from the connector portion 160 (CN1) to the relay board 70 via an electric wire such as a cable
Since the test-firing signal is transmitted to the

The data line 211 (signal line) and the clock line 212 (signal line) are connected to the connector section 160.
(CN1), but if the interval between the signal line and the terminal passing near the connector portion 160 (CN1) is also larger than the interval W1 (MIN), the terminal and This prevents or reduces interference (crosstalk) between signal lines.

Also, in the board (main board) of the game control device 100, the data line 211 and the clock line 2
12 (plurality of signal lines), an enable line 214, a reset line 216, and a chip select line 218 are arranged in one direction (horizontal direction) in a predetermined area 201 in parallel. Note that the predetermined area 201 includes wiring (data line 211, clock line 212, enable line 214,
, the reset line 216, and the chip select line 218) are not included. In the predetermined area 201,
The interval W2 between the enable line 214 and the signal line (clock line 212) is wider than the interval W1 between the data line 211 and the clock line 212 (W2>W1). Also, the interval W3 between the reset line 216 and the signal line (data line 211) is wider than the interval W1 (W3>W1). moreover,
The interval W4 between the chip select line 218 and the signal line (data line 211) is wider than the interval W1 (W4>W1). By adjusting the spacing between the wirings in this manner, interference (crosstalk) can be made less likely to occur in the predetermined region 201 where the wirings are arranged in parallel and interference (crosstalk) is likely to occur. Note that in the present embodiment, the data line 211 in the predetermined region 201
and the clock line 212 corresponds to the minimum spacing W1(MIN).

[Wiring example 2]
FIG. 64 shows a connector section 160 (CN
1) and a wiring example (wiring example 2) between the buffer 133 or the game microcomputer 111, based on the position (physical layout) where the wiring is actually arranged. In wiring example 2,
Signals passing through each terminal are changed from wiring example 1 in FIG.
The pattern of connector wiring to CN1) has also been changed.

Note that in FIG. 64, the relationship of the intervals between the wirings is maintained from the wiring example 1 of FIG. Therefore, the relationships W2>W1 (MIN), W3>W1 (MIN), and W4>W1 (MIN) are established. Furthermore, in the predetermined region 201 where each wiring is arranged in parallel, W2>W1, W3
>W1 and W4>W1.

Specifically, in FIG. 64, the terminal for the serial data signal (TXB), the terminal for the serial clock signal (CKB), and the terminal for the enable signal (OE) are interchanged from the wiring example 1 in FIG. there is In the connector section 160 (CN1), the terminal D2 is a clock terminal for a serial clock signal (CKB), the terminal D6 is a data terminal for a serial data signal (TXB), and the terminal D7 is an enable terminal for an enable signal. buffer 13
3 or the arrangement of the terminals of the gaming microcomputer 111 are also interchanged from the wiring example 1 of FIG.

By exchanging the terminals in this manner, the connector portion 160 (CN1
), the data line 211 and the clock line 212 (plurality of signal lines) are collectively arranged on the outside (right side), and the enable line 214, the reset line 216 and the chip select line 218 are also collectively arranged on the other outside ( left). Therefore, in the wiring example 2 of FIG. 64, even if the left and right maximum widths of the connector wiring are the same as in the wiring example 1 of FIG.
and signal line (here, data line 211), space W3 between reset line 216 and signal line (here, data line 211), chip select line 218 and signal line (here, data line 211). W4 can be wider than in wiring example 2 in FIG. 63, and signal lines (data line 211 or The effect of preventing interference by the clock line 212) is enhanced.

[Wiring example 3]
FIG. 65 shows a connector section 160 (CN
1) and the buffer 133 or the gaming microcomputer 111 (wiring example 3), based on the position (physical layout) where the wiring is actually arranged.

In this modified example of FIG. 65, in the connector part 160 (CN1), the reset terminal and the chip select terminal are switched from the wiring example 1 of FIG. It has become.

In wiring example 3 of FIG. 65, unlike wiring example 1 of FIG.
1 and the clock line 212 (plurality of signal lines) from both sides, the ground line 222a and the ground line 222b are arranged. By electrically shielding the plurality of signal lines from both sides with the ground line 222a and the ground line 222b, the signal lines can be connected to other wiring (enable line 214, reset line 216, chip select line 218, etc.) by the plurality of signal lines. interference (crosstalk) can be reduced. In order to reduce (prevent) interference (crosstalk) between the data line 211 and the clock line 212, the ground terminal D9 is also connected between the data line 211 and the clock line 212.
A ground wire may be provided that connects to

65, the ground line 222c is arranged outside the enable line 214 (on the side opposite to the clock line 212), and the ground line 222d is arranged outside the reset line 216 (on the side opposite to the data line 211). are placed. Enable line 214 is connected to ground line 222a and ground line 2.
22c from both sides for electrical shielding can reduce interference from other wiring (including clock line 212, data line 211, and wiring not connected to connector section 160) to enable line 214. FIG. In addition, by sandwiching the reset line 216 from both sides with the ground line 222b and the ground line 222d and electrically shielding it, other wiring to the reset line 216 (the clock line 212, the data line 211, as well as the connector section 160) can be connected. (including wiring that does not connect).

Incidentally, the ground lines 222a to 222d may be collectively referred to as ground wiring. data line 211
, the clock line 212 and the enable line 214 are wiring used for outputting test-firing test signals relating to the gaming machine, and may be collectively called signal wiring. In the main substrate, each signal wiring (data line 211, clock line 212 and enable line 214) is sandwiched between and arranged between a plurality of ground wirings and shielded. Therefore, it is possible to suppress or prevent the occurrence of interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the signal wiring for outputting the test signal and other wiring, which adversely affects the testing of the gaming machine.

Specifically, a ground line 222a is arranged between one signal line (clock line 212) and enable line 214, and the other signal line (data line 211) and reset line 216 (and thus chip select line 218) are arranged. A ground line 222b is arranged between. enable line 214
A ground line 222c is arranged outside the , and a ground line 222d is arranged between the reset line 216 and the chip select line 218 . The ground line 222a is grounded by connecting to the ground terminal D4. The ground line 222b is grounded by connecting to the ground terminal D1. The ground line 222c is grounded by connecting to the ground terminal D8. The ground line 222d is grounded by connecting to the ground terminal D5. These ground wires 22
2a, the ground line 222b, the ground line 222c, and the ground line 222d are grounded terminals (2A2, 2A3, etc.) of the buffer 133 or grounded terminals of the gaming microcomputer 111 (not shown).
The effect of the shield is further strengthened by being connected to

Note that in FIG. 65, the relationship of the intervals between the wirings is maintained from the wiring example 1 in FIG. Therefore, the relationships W2>W1 (MIN), W3>W1 (MIN), and W4>W1 (MIN) are established. Furthermore, in the predetermined region 201 where each wiring is arranged in parallel, W2>W1, W3
>W1 and W4>W1.

[Modified example of wiring]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining a wiring example (modification) when the chip select line 218 is omitted, based on the position (physical layout) where the wiring is actually arranged.

In this modification, the connector section 160 (CN1) does not have a chip select terminal, the terminal D3 is an enable terminal, and the terminal D2 is a ground terminal (FIG. 66(b)).
)). Also, the positions of the terminals of the buffer 133 or the game microcomputer 111 are changed from those in FIG. 63 (FIG. 66(a)).

Also in this modified example, the relationships W2>W1 (MIN) and W3>W1 (MIN) are established. Furthermore, in the predetermined region 201 where each wiring is arranged in parallel, W2>W1, W3>W1
relationship is established. Therefore, also in this modification, interference (crosstalk) between the data line 211 and the clock line 212 and other wiring (the enable line 214 and the reset line 216) can be reduced.

〔Relay board〕
FIG. 67 is a circuit diagram illustrating a circuit diagram related to the relay board 70 and an electric circuit (electronic circuit) around the connector section 162 (CN2) and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 192. FIG.

In this embodiment, the relay board 70 is also a double-sided printed board (double-sided board) like the board (main board) of the game control device 100 . In this embodiment, circuit components (electronic components such as ICs and connectors) are arranged on the upper surface of the relay board 70 . Note that the circuit components may be arranged on both sides or the bottom surface of the relay board 70 . In the relay board 70, wiring such as the data line 211, the clock line 212, the enable line 214, the reset line 216, the chip select line 218, and the terminals to which these are connected are arranged on the upper surface (front side, upper layer) and the lower surface (back side, lower layer). It is arranged on the upper surface (it may be on the lower surface). Note that the relay board 70 may be a general multilayer printed board (multilayer board). In this case, data line 211, clock line 2
12. Wirings such as enable line 214, reset line 216, chip select line 218, etc. and terminals to which these are connected are arranged in the outer layer (top layer, surface layer), and the inner two layers (inner layer) are the power supply layer and the ground layer ( ground layer, GND layer).

The connector portion 162 (CN2) of the relay board 70 is connected to the connector portion 160 (CN1) of the game control device 100 (main board) by an electric wire such as a cable. connector portion 162 (CN
2) terminals F1-F12 are connected to terminals D1-D12 of the connector section 160 (CN1), respectively.
corresponding to the electrical connection. The connector portion 162 (CN2) has ground terminals F1, F4, F5, F8, and F9 for grounding, and power terminals F11 and F12 to which a voltage of 5V is supplied.

In this embodiment, in the relay board 70 (double-sided board), the ground terminals F1 and F4 on the upper surface
, F5, F8, and F9 are grounded by being connected to a ground line (not shown) present on the lower surface (back side, lower layer) through through holes, through vias, or the like. The power terminals F11 and F12 on the upper surface are connected to power lines (not shown) present on the lower surface (back side, lower layer) through through holes, through vias, or the like. A ground wire (not shown) to which these ground terminals are connected and a power wire (not shown) to which a power terminal is connected may exist on the upper surface (front side, upper layer). Also, the relay board 70
is a multilayer substrate, the ground terminals F1, F4, F5, F8, and F9 are connected to internal ground layers (ground layers, GND layers) by through holes, through vias, or the like. Also, the power terminals F11 and F12 are connected to the internal power layer by through holes, through vias, or the like.

A serial data signal (TXB), a serial clock signal (CKB), a chip select signal (SB0), an enable signal (OE), and a reset signal (RESET) from the connector section 160 (CN1) are respectively sent to the connector section 162 (CN2). terminals F7, F6, F3, F2 of
, F10 to the data line 211, the clock line 212, the chip select line 218, the enable line 214 and the reset line 216. FIG.

The serial data signal (TXB), serial clock signal (CKB), chip select signal (SB0), enable signal (OE), and reset signal (RESET) are
1 to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 192 . Serial/parallel conversion circuit 1
92, the test firing test signal (serial data) included in the serial data signal (TXB),
It converts it into a parallel data signal and outputs a test-firing test signal as parallel data.

The buffer 191 is a three-state buffer like the buffer 133, and corrects and outputs the logic value voltage (L level or H level). The buffer 191 connects the input terminals NA1 to NA8 when the inputs to the /1G terminal and the /2G terminal are both at L level (GND).
is output from the output terminals NY1 to NY8 as it is, and when any of the inputs to the /1G terminal and /2G terminal is at H level, the input terminals NA1 to NA8 are output as they are.
and the output terminals NY1 to NY8 are in a high impedance state and electrically separated. "/" indicates a negative logic terminal. In FIG. 67, the inputs to the /1G terminal and the /2G terminal are both L level (GND), and the signals applied to the input terminals NA1 to NA8 are respectively output to the NY terminal.
Output from 1-NY8.

A reset line 216 and a data line 211 from the connector section 162 (CN2) are connected to the buffer 1
91 input terminals NA1 and NA2. A reset signal (RESE
T) and the serial data signal (TXB) on the data line 211 are respectively input to the input terminals NA1 and NA2 of the buffer 191 and output from the output terminals NY1 and NY2 to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 192 .

On the other hand, the clock line 212 is bifurcated and connected to the input terminals NA3 and NA4 of the buffer 191 . The serial clock signal (CKB) on the clock line 212 is input to the input terminals NA3 and NA4 of the buffer 191, and the serial clock signal C is output from the output terminals NY3 and NY4.
They are output to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 192 as KB1 and CKB2.

The chip select line 218 is branched into two and connected to the input terminals NA5 and NA6 of the buffer 191 . A chip select signal (SB0) on the chip select line 218 is
are input to the input terminals NA5 and NA6, and output from the output terminals NY5 and NY6 to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 192 as chip select signals SB01 and SB02.

The enable line 214 is branched into two and connected to the input terminals NA7 and NA8 of the buffer 191. FIG. The enable signal (OE) on the enable line 214 is connected to the input terminal NA of the buffer 191.
7 and NA8, and output from output terminals NY7 and NY8 to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 192 as enable signals OE1 and OE2.

A pull-up resistor R is connected to the data line 211 , the clock line 212 , the enable line 214 , the reset line 216 and the chip select line 218 before being connected to the buffer 191 .

63 to 66 are the data lines 211 on the relay board 70.
and the clock line 212 or the minimum interval W1 (MIN), the interval W2 between the enable line 214 and the signal line (the data line 211 or the clock line 212) near the enable line 214, the reset line 216 and the corresponding The signal line on the side closer to the reset line 216 (the data line 211
or the clock line 212), and the spacing W4 between the chip select line 218 and the signal line (data line 211 or clock line 212) on the side closer to the chip select line 218. For example, between the connector section 162 (CN2) and the buffer 191, W2
>W1 (MIN), W3>W1 (MIN), and W4>W1 (MIN), and furthermore, in the predetermined region 201 where the wirings are arranged in parallel, W2>W1, W3>W1, W4
>W1 is established. Therefore, even on the relay board 70, interference of the signal line (data line 211 or clock line 212) with other wiring such as the enable line 214, the reset line 216, the chip select line 218, etc. to which pulse signals are not frequently transmitted is prevented. strengthens the preventive effect.

The serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 192 consists of ten 8-bit serial-to-parallel conversion IC chips 192a to 192j connected in cascade, converts a maximum 8×10-bit serial data signal (TXB) into a parallel data signal, and converts it into a test firing test signal. can be output as The serial data signal (TXB) is sequentially serial-parallel converted IC chip 192a-1.
Pass 92j.

Five 8-bit serial-to-parallel conversion IC chips 192a-192e (first group)
and five 8-bit serial-to-parallel conversion IC chips 192f-192j (second group)
, branched serial clock signals CKB1 and CKB2, chip select signal S
B01, SB02 and enable signals OE1, OE2 are input in parallel at the same time. Therefore, the serial-to-parallel conversion IC chips 192a-192e of the first group and the serial-to-parallel conversion IC chips 192f-192j of the second group operate synchronously, and parallel data signals (test firing test signals) are generated simultaneously by the enable signals OE1 and OE2. signal). A reset signal (RESET) can be simultaneously input in parallel to each of the serial/parallel conversion IC chips 192a to 192j. That is, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 192
A reset signal for each serial/parallel conversion IC chip 192a-192j
are reset (initialized) at the same time, and the internal data is cleared.

Each serial/parallel conversion IC chip 192a-192j is a general 8-bit serial/parallel conversion circuit having a shift register and a parallel data latch circuit (data register). Chip select signals SB01 and SB02 (SB0) function as latch signals. The parallel data latch circuit takes in the data of the shift register according to the chip select signals SB01 and SB02. Each serial/parallel conversion IC chip 192a-1
The data fetched into the parallel data latch circuit 92j is output by the enable signal OE (OE
1 or OE2) is input, it is output as an 8-bit parallel data signal. By inputting the enable signal OE to an output circuit such as a three-state buffer,
Parallel data signals are output through the output circuit that is enabled for output operation.

If there is no chip select line 218 as shown in FIG. 66, the output circuit may be eliminated and the enable signal OE (OE1 or OE2) may be used as the latch signal. The parallel data latch circuit of each serial-to-parallel conversion IC chip 192a-192j captures the data of the shift register at the timing when the enable signal OE is input as the latch signal, and outputs the data as it is as an 8-bit parallel data signal.

Further, when a latch clock is used as a latch signal for the chip select signals SB01 and SB02 (SB0), the pulse signal is frequently transmitted to the chip select line 218 as well. The chip select line 218 may also be included in the plurality of signal lines, and the data line 211, the clock line 212, and the chip select line 218 may not be arranged collectively to establish the relationship W4>W1 (MIN).

In this embodiment, the predetermined circuit that enables the enable line 214 to operate is the serial/parallel conversion circuit 192 provided on the relay board 70, and the operation of the predetermined circuit is an output operation, but is limited to this. isn't it. For example, by connecting the enable line 214 or a separately provided enable line to the /1G terminal and /2G terminal of the buffer 191, the buffer 19
It is also possible to control the output or input operation of 1.

[Functions and effects of the fourth embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 can generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the stop result of the game (variation display game) is a special result. The gaming machine 10 has a plurality of signal lines (for example, data line 211 and clock line 212) for communicating with a predetermined circuit (for example, serial-parallel conversion circuit 192) and an enable line 21 for enabling operation of the predetermined circuit.
4 (or a reset line 216 for resetting a predetermined circuit) is wired (for example, the main board 100 and the relay board 70). On the substrate, the spacing W2 (or W3) between the enable line 214 (or reset line 216) and the signal line closer to the enable line 214 (or reset line 216) is the minimum spacing W1 (MIN ).

The minimum interval W1 (MIN) between the plurality of signal lines is usually an interval that can prevent interference (crosstalk) between the plurality of signal lines. or reset line 216) and the corresponding enable line 214 (or reset line 2
16) is changed from the minimum spacing W1 (
MIN), interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the enable line 214 (or reset line 216) and the signal line can be prevented or suppressed.

In the fourth embodiment, the multiple signal lines are the clock line 212 for serial communication.
and data line 211 . The data line 211 transmits a test signal (for example, a test-fire test signal) regarding the gaming machine 10 . Therefore, interference from the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) to the test signal, which is an important signal, can be prevented or suppressed, and adverse effects on the test of the gaming machine 10 can be prevented.

In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of signal lines (eg, data lines 211 and clock lines 212) are collectively arranged on a board (eg, main board 100, relay board 70), and enable line 21
4 (or reset line 216) and the signal line. Therefore, by shielding multiple signal lines with ground lines, the enable line 214 (or reset line 2
16) and signal lines can be prevented or suppressed.

In the fourth embodiment, a substrate (for example, the main substrate 100 and the relay substrate 70) has a predetermined area 201 in which enable lines 214 (or reset lines 216) and a plurality of signal lines are arranged in parallel. In the predetermined region 201, the distance W2 (or W3) between the enable line 214 (or reset line 216) and the signal line closer to the enable line 214 (or reset line 216)
is wider than the interval between the signal lines. Therefore, in the predetermined region 201 where the enable line 214 (or reset line 216) and a plurality of signal lines are arranged in parallel and interference (crosstalk, line crosstalk) is likely to occur, interference (crosstalk, line crosstalk) can be made difficult to occur. can.

In the fourth embodiment, a board (for example, the main board 100) has a connector portion 160 for connecting to another board (for example, the relay board 70) on which a predetermined circuit is installed. connector part 16
0 includes a plurality of signal terminals to which a plurality of signal lines are respectively connected, an enable terminal (or reset terminal) to which the enable line 214 (or reset line 216) is connected, and an enable terminal (
and a ground terminal (GND) closer to the signal terminal than the reset terminal). Therefore, the ground terminal (GND) can widen the distance between the enable terminal (or reset terminal) and the signal terminal, thereby preventing interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the enable terminal (or reset terminal) and the signal terminal. or can be suppressed. Also, the enable line 214 (or the reset line 21
6) and the signal line, enabling line 214 (or reset line 2).
16) and the signal line can be suppressed.

In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is provided with game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game (variation display game), and when the game stop result is a special result, it is advantageous to the player. A special game state can be generated. Game control means (for example, game control device 1
00) is a game control program (for example, an interrupt processing program related to timer interrupt processing)
A game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) that stores , and an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) that performs required arithmetic processing according to the game control program. Arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) can output a test signal (for example, a test-fire test signal) related to the gaming machine 10 by serial communication according to a game control program (output processing (A130
6)).

Therefore, in the game control means (for example, the game control device 100), the number of wires (the number of signals) and the number of connector terminals (the number of pins) can be reduced, and the space (place) for arranging electronic components can be sufficiently secured, thereby reducing the cost. It also leads to reduction. In the case of parallel communication, it is necessary to provide wiring and terminals according to the type of data to be transmitted.
number of pins) increases.

In the fourth embodiment, arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) takes in signals from switches (for example, starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, big winning port switch 39a), and then serially communicates them as test signals. can be output with Therefore, even if the number of switches differs depending on the model of the gaming machine 10, signals from the switches are taken in by the arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) and output as test signals by serial communication. The wiring can be reduced, and it becomes easier to share the game control means (for example, the game control device 100) between different models.

In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes relay means (for example, a relay board 70) that converts a test signal as a serial data signal into a parallel data signal and then outputs the parallel data signal to a test device that performs a test. Therefore, it is easy to share the relay means (for example, the relay board 70) between different models simply by preparing wiring necessary for serial communication in the relay means (for example, the relay board 70) in advance.

In the fourth embodiment, the serial data signal from the arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) is converted into a parallel data signal, and the light emitting section (for example, the LED of the collective display device 50) or the solenoid (for example, the big winning opening solenoid 39b, the general electric (For example, driver IC chips 156 and 157, driver 1
38a-138d, 150). Arithmetic processing means (e.g. CPU 111a) outputs a serial data signal to drive means from a first serial port (e.g. serial port 173a), and outputs a serial data signal to relay means (e.g. relay board 70) from a second serial port (e.g. relay board 70). For example, output from the serial port 173b).

Therefore, even if the number of solenoids differs depending on the model of the game machine 10, the drive signal for the solenoids is output from the arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) by serial communication, thus reducing the wiring required for parallel communication. This makes it easier to share game control means (for example, the game control device 100) between different models. Further, arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a
) outputs the serial data signal to the drive means and the serial data signal to the relay means from separate serial ports, so it is not necessary to create a serial data signal containing data for both the drive means and the relay means. , output processing to the drive means and the relay means is simplified.

Further, as described above, the arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) transmits the serial data signal to the relay means (for example, the relay board 70) to the first serial port (for example, the serial port 17).
3a) from a different second serial port (for example, serial port 173b). For this reason, parts related to the test firing test (for example, the buffer 133 and the connector section 16 as described above)
0) is not mounted during mass production (other than during inspection), the first serial port (eg, serial port 173a) is connected to the driving means (eg, drivers 138a-138d, 150).
external information terminal 71, batch display device 50, solenoids 39b, 37c,
86b, the control of the performance display device 152 or the like is not affected.

In the fourth embodiment, when the game stop result is a special result, the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player outputs a test signal (for example, a test fire test signal) related to the gaming machine 10. A substrate (for example, main substrate 100, relay substrate 70) having signal wiring (for example, data line 211, clock line 212, enable line 214) is provided. On the substrate, the signal wiring is sandwiched between a plurality of ground wirings (eg, ground wirings 222a-222d). Therefore, the signal wiring is shielded, and it is possible to suppress or prevent a situation in which the testing of the gaming machine is adversely affected by noise or interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) on the signal wiring.

In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the game stop result is a special result includes a predetermined circuit (for example, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 19).
A board (for example, the main board 100 and the relay board 70) having an enable wiring (for example, an enable line 214) capable of transmitting an enable signal enabling the operation of 2) is provided. On the substrate, the enable wiring is arranged sandwiched between a plurality of ground wirings (eg, ground wirings 222a-222d). Therefore, interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the enable wiring and other wiring
It is possible to suppress or prevent a situation in which a predetermined circuit malfunctions due to the occurrence of

In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the game stop result is a special result includes a predetermined circuit (for example, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 19).
2) reset wiring (for example, reset line 216) capable of transmitting a reset signal for resetting
A substrate (for example, the main substrate 100 and the relay substrate 70) is provided. In the substrate, the reset wiring is sandwiched between a plurality of ground wirings. Therefore, it is possible to suppress or prevent a situation in which a predetermined circuit malfunctions due to interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the reset wiring and other wiring.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. is. For example, it is possible to combine multiple embodiments. Also, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and is intended to include all changes within the scope of the claims and equivalent meanings and contents.

10 game machine 25 effect button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first start winning opening (first start winning area)
37 normal variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 Special Variable Winning Device 40 Center Case 41 Display Device 50 Collective Display Device (LED)
70 relay substrate 71 external information terminal 72a first proximity switch 72b second proximity switch 72c third proximity switch 72d fourth proximity switch 100 game control device (main substrate)
152 performance display device 160, 162 connector section 173a, 173b serial port 174a, 174b serial signal line 191 buffer 192 serial-parallel conversion circuit 200 payout control device 201 predetermined area 211 data line 212 clock line 214 enable line 216 reset line 300 effect control device (sub board)
800 rotator unit 801 tray section,
802 Rolling surface 805 Accommodating portion 806 Extension portion 807 Guide groove 810 Rotation stage 811 Rolling surface 812 Notch portion (holding portion)
820 Gate valve 830 Obstacle nail 840 Rebound member 850 Distributing device 851 First branch flow path 853 First switching valve 860 First distributing unit 864 Second intake flow path 865 Second branch flow path 866 Second switching valve 870 Second distributing unit 871 (871A-871D) Distributing mechanism 872 (872A-872D) Inlet 873 (873A-873D) Outlet 875 Third switching valve 876 Rotating member 883 Stopper member 890 Second rotating stage 891 Second notch (second 2 holding part)

Claims (1)

A game control means capable of executing a game and an effect control means capable of executing an effect related to the game are provided, and when the game stop result is a special result, a state advantageous to the player can be generated. In a game machine that
a first display means capable of displaying the game;
a second display means capable of displaying a performance display related to gaming machine performance;
The game control means is
A game control program storage means for storing a game control program;
Arithmetic processing means for performing required processing by the game control program;
a plurality of signal patterns for outputting test signals relating to the gaming machine ;
A substrate provided with a reset signal pattern for resetting a predetermined circuit,
In the substrate, an interval between the reset signal pattern and a signal pattern on a side closer to the reset signal pattern among the plurality of signal patterns is wider than a minimum interval between the plurality of signal patterns,
The production control means is
The notice effect indicating the degree of expectation that the game stop result will result in the special result can be executed so as to include a first notice effect and a second notice effect executed after the first notice effect. ,
As the mode of the first notice effect and the mode of the second notice effect, a first identification mode or a second identification mode with a higher degree of expectation than the first identification mode can be selected, respectively,
making the degree of expectation when the second notice effect is the second identification mode higher than the degree of expectation when the first notice effect is the second identification mode,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the degree of expectation when the second notice effect is set as the first identification mode is set lower than the degree of expectation when the first notice effect is set as the first identification mode.

Images